Zyxel Gs 4012F 4024 Users Manual 4012F/GS User's Guide V3.60 (Ed. 2, May 2006)

GS-4012F4024 to the manual dc7515ff-37b6-489c-9641-208dcc1a3afb

: Zyxel Zyxel-Gs-4012F-4024-Users-Manual-310184 zyxel-gs-4012f-4024-users-manual-310184 zyxel pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 326

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

GS-4012F/4024
Ethernet Switch

User’s Guide
Version 3.60
1/2006
Edition 2

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Copyright
Copyright © 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software
described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others.
ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This
publication is subject to change without notice.

Copyright

2

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Interference Statements and
Warnings
FCC Statement
This switch complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This switch may not cause harmful interference.
2 This switch must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operations.

FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CE Mark Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Taiwanese BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection) A Warning:

Notice 1
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

3

Interference Statements and Warnings

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Certifications
1 Go to www.zyxel.com
2 Select your product from the drop-down list box on the ZyXEL home page
to go to that product's page.
3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.

Registration
Register your product online for free future product updates and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

Safety Warnings
For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.
• To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication
line cord.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high
voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel can service the device. Please contact
your vendor for further information.
• Use ONLY the dedicated power supply for your device. Connect the power cord or power adaptor to
the right supply voltage (110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT use the device if the power supply is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power supply is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power supply. Contact your local vendor to order a new power supply.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Do NOT
allow anything to rest on the power cord and do NOT locate the product where anyone can walk on
the power cord.
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical, gas or water pipes will be damaged.
• Do NOT install nor use your device during a thunderstorm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

Interference Statements and Warnings

4

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials
or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and
upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or
materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without
charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or
components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured
functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This
warranty shall not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or
subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This
warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material
Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit
be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated
warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts
and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address,
Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary
from country to country.

Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

5

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Customer Support
Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.
•
•
•
•

Product model and serial number.
Warranty Information.
Date that you received your device.
Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL

TELEPHONE*

WEB SITE

FAX

FTP SITE

REGULAR MAIL
LOCATION
CORPORATE
HEADQUARTERS
(WORLDWIDE)

CZECH REPUBLIC

DENMARK

FINLAND

SALES E-MAIL

support@zyxel.com.tw +886-3-578-3942
sales@zyxel.com.tw
info@cz.zyxel.com

+420-241-091-350

info@cz.zyxel.com

+420-241-091-359

support@zyxel.dk

+45-39-55-07-00

sales@zyxel.dk

+45-39-55-07-07

support@zyxel.fi

+358-9-4780-8411

sales@zyxel.fi

+358-9-4780 8448

info@zyxel.fr

+33-4-72-52-97-97

HUNGARY

KAZAKHSTAN

Customer Support

ZyXEL Communications
Czech s.r.o.
Modranská 621
143 01 Praha 4 - Modrany
Ceská Republika

www.zyxel.dk

ZyXEL Communications A/S
Columbusvej
2860 Soeborg
Denmark

www.zyxel.fi

ZyXEL Communications Oy
Malminkaari 10
00700 Helsinki
Finland

www.zyxel.fr

ZyXEL France
1 rue des Vergers
Bat. 1 / C
69760 Limonest
France

www.zyxel.de

ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH.
Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146
Wuerselen
Germany

www.zyxel.hu

ZyXEL Hungary
48, Zoldlomb Str.
H-1025, Budapest
Hungary

www.zyxel.kz

ZyXEL Kazakhstan
43, Dostyk ave.,Office 414
Dostyk Business Centre
050010, Almaty
Republic of Kazakhstan
ZyXEL Communications Inc.
1130 N. Miller St.
Anaheim
CA 92806-2001
U.S.A.

support@zyxel.de

+49-2405-6909-0

sales@zyxel.de

+49-2405-6909-99

support@zyxel.hu

+36-1-3361649

info@zyxel.hu

+36-1-3259100

http://zyxel.kz/support

+7-3272-590-698

sales@zyxel.kz

+7-3272-590-689

support@zyxel.com

1-800-255-4101
+1-714-632-0882

www.us.zyxel.com

sales@zyxel.com

+1-714-632-0858

ftp.us.zyxel.com

support@zyxel.no

+47-22-80-61-80

www.zyxel.no

sales@zyxel.no

+47-22-80-61-81

NORTH AMERICA

NORWAY

www.zyxel.cz

+33-4-72-52-19-20

FRANCE

GERMANY

+886-3-578-2439

www.zyxel.com
ZyXEL Communications Corp.
www.europe.zyxel.com 6 Innovation Road II
Science Park
ftp.zyxel.com
Hsinchu 300
Taiwan
ftp.europe.zyxel.com

ZyXEL Communications A/S
Nils Hansens vei 13
0667 Oslo
Norway

6

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL

TELEPHONE*

WEB SITE

SALES E-MAIL

FAX

FTP SITE

info@pl.zyxel.com

+48 (22) 333 8250

www.pl.zyxel.com

ZyXEL Communications
ul. Okrzei 1A
03-715 Warszawa
Poland

www.zyxel.ru

ZyXEL Russia
Ostrovityanova 37a Str.
Moscow, 117279
Russia

www.zyxel.es

ZyXEL Communications
Arte, 21 5ª planta
28033 Madrid
Spain

www.zyxel.se

ZyXEL Communications A/S
Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg
Sweden

www.ua.zyxel.com

ZyXEL Ukraine
13, Pimonenko Str.
Kiev, 04050
Ukraine
ZyXEL Communications UK
Ltd.,11 The Courtyard,
Eastern Road, Bracknell,
Berkshire, RG12 2XB,
United Kingdom (UK)

REGULAR MAIL
LOCATION

POLAND

RUSSIA

SPAIN

SWEDEN

+48 (22) 333 8251
http://zyxel.ru/support

+7-095-542-89-29

sales@zyxel.ru

+7-095-542-89-25

support@zyxel.es

+34-902-195-420

sales@zyxel.es

+34-913-005-345

support@zyxel.se

+46-31-744-7700

sales@zyxel.se

+46-31-744-7701

support@ua.zyxel.com +380-44-247-69-78
UKRAINE

sales@ua.zyxel.com

+380-44-494-49-32

support@zyxel.co.uk

+44-1344 303044
08707 555779 (UK only)

www.zyxel.co.uk

sales@zyxel.co.uk

+44-1344 303034

ftp.zyxel.co.uk

UNITED KINGDOM

* “+” is the (prefix) number you enter to make an international telephone call.

7

Customer Support

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Copyright .................................................................................................................. 2
Interference Statements and Warnings.................................................................. 3
ZyXEL Limited Warranty ......................................................................................... 5
Customer Support ................................................................................................... 6
Table of Contents ..................................................................................................... 8
List of Figures ........................................................................................................ 20
List of Tables .......................................................................................................... 26
Preface .................................................................................................................... 30
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch................................................................................ 32
1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 32
1.2 Software Features ............................................................................................. 32
1.3 Hardware Features ............................................................................................ 35
1.4 Applications ....................................................................................................... 36
1.4.1 Backbone Application ............................................................................... 36
1.4.2 Bridging Example ..................................................................................... 37
1.4.3 High Performance Switching Example ..................................................... 37
1.4.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples .............................................. 38
1.4.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example ............................................................. 38
1.4.4.2 VLAN Shared Server Example ....................................................... 39

Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection ................................................................ 40
2.1 Freestanding Installation ................................................................................... 40
2.2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ........................................................................ 41
2.2.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements ................................................ 41
2.2.1.1 Precautions .................................................................................... 41
2.2.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ........................................ 41
2.2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ................................................................ 41

Chapter 3
Hardware Overview................................................................................................ 44
3.1 Front Panel Connection .................................................................................... 44

Table of Contents

8

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
3.1.1 Console Port ........................................................................................... 45
3.1.2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports ............................................................................. 45
3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Settings ................................................................ 45
3.1.3 SFP Slots ................................................................................................ 45
3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation
3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal

................................................................ 46
................................................................... 46

3.2 Rear Panel ........................................................................................................ 47
3.2.1 Power Connector ..................................................................................... 47
3.2.2 External Backup Power Supply Connector ............................................. 48
3.3 Front Panel LEDs

.......................................................................................... 48

Chapter 4
The Web Configurator ........................................................................................... 50
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 50
4.2 System Login

.................................................................................................. 50

4.3 The Status Screen

........................................................................................ 51

4.3.1 Change Your Password
4.4 Switch Lockout

........................................................................ 55

................................................................................................ 56

4.5 Resetting the Switch

....................................................................................... 56

4.5.1 Reload the Configuration File ................................................................. 57
4.6 Logging Out of the Web Configurator ............................................................... 57
4.7 Help

................................................................................................................. 58

Chapter 5
Initial Setup Example............................................................................................. 60
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 60
5.1.1 Configuring an IP Interface ...................................................................... 60
5.1.2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings .......................................................... 61
5.1.3 Creating a VLAN ...................................................................................... 62
5.1.4 Setting Port VID ....................................................................................... 63
5.1.5 Enabling RIP ............................................................................................ 64

Chapter 6
System Status and Port Statistics ........................................................................ 66
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 66
6.2 Port Status Summary

...................................................................................... 66

6.2.1 Port Details ............................................................................................. 67

Chapter 7
Basic Setting ......................................................................................................... 72
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 72
7.2 System Information ........................................................................................... 72
7.3 General Setup

9

................................................................................................. 74

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
7.4 Introduction to VLANs ...................................................................................... 76
7.5 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................................ 77
7.6 Switch Setup Screen ........................................................................................ 77
7.7 IP Setup ............................................................................................................ 79
7.7.1 IP Interfaces ............................................................................................ 79
7.8 Port Setup ......................................................................................................... 81

Chapter 8
VLAN ....................................................................................................................... 84
8.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs

.................................................. 84

8.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames .............................................. 84
8.2 Automatic VLAN Registration .......................................................................... 85
8.2.1 GARP ....................................................................................................... 85
8.2.1.1 GARP Timers ................................................................................. 85
8.2.2 GVRP ....................................................................................................... 85
8.3 Port VLAN Trunking ......................................................................................... 86
8.4 Select the VLAN Type ...................................................................................... 86
8.5 Static VLAN ....................................................................................................... 87
8.5.1 Static VLAN Status ................................................................................... 87
8.5.2 Configure a Static VLAN

........................................................................ 88

8.5.3 Configure VLAN Port Settings ................................................................. 90
8.6 Port-based VLANs ........................................................................................... 91
8.6.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN .................................................................. 91

Chapter 9
Static MAC Forward Setup .................................................................................... 94
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 94
9.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding

................................................................ 94

Chapter 10
Filtering................................................................................................................... 96
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 96
10.2 Configure a Filtering Rule ............................................................................... 96

Chapter 11
Spanning Tree Protocol......................................................................................... 98
11.1.1 STP Terminology ................................................................................... 98
11.1.2 How STP Works .................................................................................... 99
11.1.3 STP Port States ..................................................................................... 99
11.2 STP Status ..................................................................................................... 99
11.2.1 Configure STP ..................................................................................... 101

Table of Contents

10

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 12
Bandwidth Control............................................................................................... 104
12.1 Introduction to Bandwidth Control ................................................................. 104
12.1.1 CIR and PIR ......................................................................................... 104
12.2 Bandwidth Control Setup ............................................................................... 104

Chapter 13
Broadcast Storm Control .................................................................................... 106
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 106
13.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup ..................................................................... 106

Chapter 14
Mirroring ............................................................................................................... 108
14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 108
14.2 Port Mirroring Configuration .......................................................................... 108

Chapter 15
Link Aggregation ..................................................................................................110
15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 110
15.1.1 Dynamic Link Aggregation

................................................................. 110

15.1.2 Link Aggregation ID ..............................................................................111
15.2 Link Aggregation Status ..................................................................................111
15.3 Link Aggregation Setup ................................................................................ 112

Chapter 16
Port Authentication...............................................................................................116
16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 116
16.1.1 RADIUS ............................................................................................... 116
16.2 Configuring Port Authentication ..................................................................... 116
16.2.1 Activating IEEE 802.1x Security ......................................................... 117
16.2.2 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings ................................................. 118

Chapter 17
Port Security......................................................................................................... 120
17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 120
17.2 Port Security Setup ........................................................................................ 120

Chapter 18
Classifier............................................................................................................... 122
18.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 122
18.2 Configuring the Classifier .............................................................................. 122
18.3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration ................................................ 125
18.4 Classifier Example ......................................................................................... 126

11

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 19
Policy Rule........................................................................................................... 128
19.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 128
19.1.1 DiffServ ................................................................................................ 128
19.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior ............................................................... 128
19.2 Configuring Policy Rules ............................................................................... 128
19.3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration ...................................................... 131
19.4 Policy Example .............................................................................................. 132

Chapter 20
Queuing Method................................................................................................... 134
20.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 134
20.1.1 Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) .............................................................. 134
20.1.2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) ......................................... 135
20.2 Configuring Queuing ...................................................................................... 135

Chapter 21
VLAN Stacking ..................................................................................................... 138
21.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 138
21.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example ...................................................................... 138
21.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles ............................................................................. 139
21.3 VLAN Tag Format .......................................................................................... 139
21.3.1 Frame Format ...................................................................................... 140
21.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking ........................................................................... 141

Chapter 22
Multicast ............................................................................................................... 144
22.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses ......................................................................... 144
22.1.2 IGMP Filtering ...................................................................................... 144
22.1.3 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................... 144
22.2 Multicast Status ............................................................................................. 145
22.2.1 Multicast Setting ................................................................................... 145
22.2.2 IGMP Filtering Profile ........................................................................... 147
22.3.1 Types of MVR Ports ............................................................................. 149
22.3.2 MVR Modes ......................................................................................... 149
22.3.3 How MVR Works .................................................................................. 149
22.4 General MVR Configuration .......................................................................... 150
22.5.1 MVR Configuration Example ................................................................ 153

Chapter 23
Static Route .......................................................................................................... 156
23.1 Configuring

Table of Contents

.................................................................................................. 156

12

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 24
RIP ........................................................................................................................ 158
24.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 158
24.2 Configuring

.................................................................................................. 158

Chapter 25
OSPF ..................................................................................................................... 160
25.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 160
25.1.1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas .............................................. 160
25.1.2 How OSPF Works ................................................................................ 161
25.1.3 Interfaces and Virtual Links .................................................................. 161
25.1.4 Configuring OSPF ............................................................................... 161
25.2 OSPF Status ................................................................................................ 162
25.3 Enabling OSPF and General Settings .......................................................... 163
25.4 Configuring OSPF Areas .............................................................................. 165
25.4.1 Viewing OSPF Area Information Table ................................................. 166
25.5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces ....................................................................... 167
25.6 OSPF Virtual Links

...................................................................................... 168

Chapter 26
IGMP...................................................................................................................... 172
26.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 172
26.2 Configuring

.................................................................................................. 172

Chapter 27
DVMRP .................................................................................................................. 174
27.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 174
27.2 How DVMRP Works ...................................................................................... 174
27.2.1 DVMRP Terminology ........................................................................... 175
27.3 Configuring DVMRP ..................................................................................... 175
27.3.1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages .............................................. 176
27.4 Default DVMRP Timer Values ...................................................................... 177

Chapter 28
IP Multicast ........................................................................................................... 178
28.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 178
28.2 Configuring .................................................................................................... 178

Chapter 29
Differentiated Services ........................................................................................ 180
29.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 180
29.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior .............................................................. 180
29.1.2 DiffServ Network Example .................................................................. 180

13

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
29.2 Activating DiffServ ........................................................................................ 181
29.3 DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p Priority Mapping

...................................................... 182

29.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings .................................................................. 182

Chapter 30
DHCP..................................................................................................................... 184
30.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 184
30.1.1 DHCP modes ...................................................................................... 184
30.2 DHCP Server Status ...................................................................................... 184
30.3 Configuring DHCP Server ........................................................................... 185
30.3.1 DHCP Server Configuration Example .................................................. 187
30.4 DHCP Relay .................................................................................................. 187
30.4.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information ........................................................... 188
30.4.2 Configuring DHCP Relay ..................................................................... 188
30.4.3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ................................................... 189

Chapter 31
VRRP ..................................................................................................................... 190
31.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 190
31.2 Viewing VRRP Status

.................................................................................. 191

31.3 Configuring VRRP ......................................................................................... 192
31.3.1 IP Interface Setup ............................................................................... 192
31.3.2 VRRP Parameters ............................................................................... 193
31.3.2.1 Advertisement Interval ............................................................... 193
31.3.2.2 Priority ....................................................................................... 193
31.3.2.3 Preempt Mode ........................................................................... 193
31.3.3 Configuring VRRP Parameters ............................................................ 194
31.4 VRRP Configuration Summary ...................................................................... 195
31.5 VRRP Configuration Examples .................................................................... 195
31.5.1 One Subnet Network Example ............................................................ 195
31.5.2 Two Subnets Example ........................................................................ 197

Chapter 32
Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 200
32.1 The Maintenance Screen .............................................................................. 200
32.2 Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................ 200
32.3 Restore a Configuration File ......................................................................... 201
32.4 Backing Up a Configuration File ................................................................... 201
32.5 Load Factory Defaults .................................................................................. 202
32.6 Reboot System .............................................................................................. 202
32.7 FTP Command Line ...................................................................................... 203
32.7.1 Filename Conventions ........................................................................ 203
32.7.1.1 Example FTP Commands .......................................................... 203

Table of Contents

14

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
32.7.2 FTP Command Line Procedure .......................................................... 204
32.7.3 GUI-based FTP Clients ........................................................................ 204
32.7.4 FTP Restrictions .................................................................................. 205

Chapter 33
Access Control..................................................................................................... 206
33.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 206
33.2 The Access Control Main Screen .................................................................. 206
33.3 About SNMP ................................................................................................. 207
33.3.1 Supported MIBs

................................................................................. 208

33.3.2 SNMP Traps ....................................................................................... 208
33.3.3 Configuring SNMP .............................................................................. 209
33.3.4 Setting Up Login Accounts ................................................................. 209
33.4 SSH Overview ............................................................................................... 211
33.5 How SSH works ............................................................................................. 211
33.6 SSH Implementation on the Switch ............................................................... 212
33.6.1 Requirements for Using SSH ............................................................... 212
33.7 Introduction to HTTPS ................................................................................... 212
33.8 HTTPS Example ............................................................................................ 213
33.8.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ................................................... 213
33.8.2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages .............................................. 214
33.8.3 The Main Screen .................................................................................. 215
33.9 Service Port Access Control ........................................................................ 217
33.10 Remote Management ................................................................................ 217

Chapter 34
Diagnostic............................................................................................................. 220
34.1 Diagnostic ..................................................................................................... 220

Chapter 35
Cluster Management............................................................................................ 222
35.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 222
35.2 Cluster Management Status ......................................................................... 223
35.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management ................................................. 224
35.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch

.................... 224

35.3 Configuring Cluster Management ................................................................. 225

Chapter 36
MAC Table............................................................................................................. 228
36.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 228
36.2 Viewing the MAC Table ................................................................................. 229

15

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 37
IP Table ................................................................................................................. 230
37.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 230
37.2 Viewing the IP Table ..................................................................................... 231

Chapter 38
ARP Table ............................................................................................................. 232
38.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 232
38.1.1 How ARP Works .................................................................................. 232
38.2 Viewing the ARP Table ................................................................................. 232

Chapter 39
Routing Table ....................................................................................................... 234
39.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 234
39.2 Viewing the Routing Table ............................................................................ 234

Chapter 40
Introducing the Commands .............................................................................. 236
40.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 236
40.1.1 Switch Configuration File ..................................................................... 236
40.2 Accessing the CLI .......................................................................................... 236
40.2.1 Access Priority .................................................................................... 237
40.2.2 The Console Port ................................................................................. 237
40.2.2.1 Initial Screen ............................................................................... 237
40.2.3 Telnet ................................................................................................... 237
40.3 The Login Screen ......................................................................................... 238
40.4 Command Syntax Conventions ..................................................................... 238
40.5 Getting Help ................................................................................................... 239
40.5.1 List of Available Commands ................................................................. 239
40.5.2 Detailed Command Information ........................................................... 240
40.6 Command Modes .......................................................................................... 240
40.7 Using Command History ................................................................................ 241
40.8 Saving Your Configuration ............................................................................. 241
40.8.1 Logging Out .......................................................................................... 242
40.9 Command Summary ...................................................................................... 242
40.9.1 User Mode ............................................................................................ 242
40.9.2 Enable Mode ........................................................................................ 243
40.9.3 General Configuration Mode ................................................................ 247
40.9.4 interface port-channel Commands ....................................................... 261
40.9.5 interface route-domain Commands ...................................................... 264
40.9.6 config-vlan Commands ........................................................................ 265
40.10 mvr Commands ........................................................................................... 266

Table of Contents

16

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 41
Command Examples........................................................................................... 268
41.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 268
41.2 show Commands ........................................................................................... 268
41.2.1 show system-information .................................................................... 268
41.2.2 show hardware-monitor ........................................................................ 269
41.2.3 show ip ................................................................................................. 269
41.2.4 show logging ....................................................................................... 270
41.2.5 show interface ..................................................................................... 270
41.2.6 show mac address-table ..................................................................... 271
41.3 ping ............................................................................................................... 272
41.4 traceroute ...................................................................................................... 273
41.5 Enabling RSTP .............................................................................................. 273
41.6 Configuration File Maintenance .................................................................... 274
41.6.1 Configuration Backup ........................................................................... 274
41.6.2 Configuration Restoration ................................................................... 274
41.6.3 Using a Different Configuration File ..................................................... 275
41.6.4 Resetting to the Factory Default ........................................................... 275
41.7 no Command Examples ................................................................................ 276
41.7.1 no mirror-port ...................................................................................... 276
41.7.2 no https timeout .................................................................................... 276
41.7.3 no trunk ................................................................................................ 277
41.7.4 no port-access-authenticator ................................................................ 277
41.7.5 no ssh ................................................................................................... 278
41.8 interface Commands ..................................................................................... 278
41.8.1 interface port-channel ......................................................................... 279
41.8.2 interface route-domain ......................................................................... 279
41.8.3 bpdu-control ........................................................................................ 280
41.8.4 broadcast-limit ..................................................................................... 280
41.8.5 bandwidth-limit .................................................................................... 281
41.8.6 mirror ................................................................................................... 282
41.8.7 gvrp ..................................................................................................... 282
41.8.8 ingress-check ...................................................................................... 283
41.8.9 frame-type ........................................................................................... 283
41.8.10 spq .................................................................................................... 284
41.8.11 wrr ..................................................................................................... 284
41.8.12 egress set .......................................................................................... 285
41.8.13 qos priority .......................................................................................... 285
41.8.14 name .................................................................................................. 286
41.8.15 speed-duplex ...................................................................................... 286

17

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Chapter 42
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ............................................................. 288
42.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Overview .......................................................... 288
42.2 VLAN Databases ........................................................................................... 288
42.2.1 Static Entries (SVLAN Table) ............................................................... 288
42.2.2 Dynamic Entries (DVLAN Table) .......................................................... 289
42.3 Configuring Tagged VLAN ............................................................................. 289
42.4 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands ............................ 290
42.4.1 GARP Status ........................................................................................ 290
42.4.2 GARP Timer ........................................................................................ 290
42.4.3 GVRP Timer ......................................................................................... 291
42.4.4 Enable GVRP ....................................................................................... 291
42.4.5 Disable GVRP ...................................................................................... 292
42.5 Port VLAN Commands .................................................................................. 292
42.5.1 Set Port VID ........................................................................................ 292
42.5.2 Set Acceptable Frame Type ................................................................. 292
42.5.3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP .............................................................. 293
42.5.4 Modify Static VLAN ............................................................................. 293
42.5.4.1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example ......................................... 294
42.5.4.2 Forwarding Process Example ..................................................... 294
42.5.5 Delete VLAN ID .................................................................................... 294
42.6 Enable VLAN ................................................................................................ 295
42.7 Disable VLAN ................................................................................................ 295
42.8 Show VLAN Setting ...................................................................................... 295

Chapter 43
Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 298
43.1 Problems Starting Up the Switch ................................................................... 298
43.2 Problems Accessing the Switch .................................................................... 298
43.2.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ......................... 299
43.2.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers .............................................. 299
43.2.1.2 JavaScripts ................................................................................. 302
43.2.1.3 Java Permissions ....................................................................... 304
43.3 Problems with the Password ......................................................................... 306

Appendix A
Product Specifications ........................................................................................ 308
Appendix B
IP Subnetting........................................................................................................ 312
Index...................................................................................................................... 320

Table of Contents

18

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

19

Table of Contents

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

List of Figures
Figure 1 Backbone Application .............................................................................. 37
Figure 2 Bridging Application ................................................................................ 37
Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application ............................... 38
Figure 4 Tag-based VLAN Application ................................................................... 39
Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example ...................................................... 39
Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet ........................................................................... 40
Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets ............................................................. 41
Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .............................................................. 42
Figure 9 Front Panel: GS-4024

............................................................................ 44

Figure 10 Front Panel: GS-4012F

........................................................................ 44

Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Example ........................................................... 46
Figure 12 Installed Transceiver

........................................................................... 46

Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example ............................................ 46
Figure 14 Transceiver Removal Example .............................................................. 47
Figure 15 Rear Panel: GS-4012F .......................................................................... 47
Figure 16 Rear Panel: GS-4024 ............................................................................ 47
Figure 17 Read Panel: GS-4012F (DC Model) ...................................................... 47
Figure 18 Web Configurator: Login ........................................................................ 51
Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status) .............................................. 51
Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password ................................................. 56
Figure 21 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port ........................................... 57
Figure 22 Web Configurator: Logout Screen ......................................................... 58
Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example: IP Interface .......................................... 60
Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN ................................................... 62
Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID ............................................... 63
Figure 26 Status .................................................................................................... 66
Figure 27 Status: Port Details ................................................................................ 68
Figure 28 System Info ........................................................................................... 73
Figure 29 General Setup ....................................................................................... 75
Figure 30 Switch Setup ......................................................................................... 77
Figure 31 IP Setup .................................................................................................. 80
Figure 32 Port Setup ............................................................................................. 82
Figure 33 Port VLAN Trunking ............................................................................... 86
Figure 34 Switch Setup: Select VLAN Type .......................................................... 87
Figure 35 VLAN: VLAN Status ............................................................................... 87
Figure 36 VLAN: Static VLAN ............................................................................... 89
Figure 37 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting ...................................................................... 90
Figure 38 Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected) .............................................. 92

List of Figures

20

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation) ............................................... 92
Figure 40 Static MAC Forwarding .......................................................................... 94
Figure 41 Filtering .................................................................................................. 96
Figure 42 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status ............................................................. 100
Figure 43 Spanning Tree Protocol: Configuration .................................................. 101
Figure 44 Bandwidth Control ................................................................................. 105
Figure 45 Broadcast Storm Control ....................................................................... 106
Figure 46 Mirroring ................................................................................................ 108
Figure 47 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status ............................................. 111
Figure 48 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration ................................. 113
Figure 49 RADIUS Server

.................................................................................... 116

Figure 50 Port Authentication ................................................................................ 117
Figure 51 Port Authentication: 802.1x ................................................................... 117
Figure 52 Port Authentication: RADIUS ................................................................ 118
Figure 53 Port Security .......................................................................................... 120
Figure 54 Classifier ................................................................................................ 123
Figure 55 Classifier: Summary Table ..................................................................... 125
Figure 56 Classifier: Example ................................................................................ 127
Figure 57 Policy .................................................................................................... 129
Figure 58 Policy: Summary Table .......................................................................... 131
Figure 59 Policy Example ...................................................................................... 133
Figure 60 Queuing Method .................................................................................... 135
Figure 61 VLAN Stacking Example ....................................................................... 139
Figure 62 VLAN Stacking ...................................................................................... 141
Figure 63 Multicast: Status .................................................................................... 145
Figure 64 Multicast: Setting ................................................................................... 146
Figure 65 Multicast: Setting: IGMP Filtering Profile ............................................... 147
Figure 66 MVR Network Example ......................................................................... 149
Figure 67 MVR Multicast Television Example ....................................................... 150
Figure 68 Multicast: Setting: MVR ......................................................................... 150
Figure 69 MVR: Group Configuration .................................................................... 152
Figure 70 MVR Configuration Example ................................................................. 153
Figure 71 MVR Configuration Example ................................................................. 153
Figure 72 MVR Group Configuration Example ..................................................... 154
Figure 73 MVR Group Configuration Example ...................................................... 154
Figure 74 Static Routing ........................................................................................ 156
Figure 75 RIP ........................................................................................................ 159
Figure 76 OSPF Network Example ........................................................................ 161
Figure 77 OSPF Status .......................................................................................... 162
Figure 78 OSPF Configuration: Activating and General Settings .......................... 164
Figure 79 OSPF Configuration: Area Setup .......................................................... 165
Figure 80 OSPF Configuration: Summary Table ................................................... 166
Figure 81 OSPF Interface ...................................................................................... 167

21

List of Figures

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 82 OSPF Virtual Link .................................................................................. 169
Figure 83 IGMP ..................................................................................................... 172
Figure 84 How DVMRP Works .............................................................................. 175
Figure 85 DVMRP ................................................................................................. 175
Figure 86 DVMRP: IGMP/RIP Not Set Error ......................................................... 176
Figure 87 DVMRP: Unable to Disable IGMP Error ................................................ 176
Figure 88 DVMRP: Duplicate VID Error Message ................................................. 177
Figure 89 IP Multicast ............................................................................................ 178
Figure 90 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field ..................................................... 180
Figure 91 DiffServ Network Example ..................................................................... 181
Figure 92 DiffServ .................................................................................................. 181
Figure 93 DiffServ: DSCP Setting .......................................................................... 182
Figure 94 DHCP: DHCP Server Status ................................................................. 185
Figure 95 DHCP: Server ....................................................................................... 186
Figure 96 DHCP Server Network Example ........................................................... 187
Figure 97 DHCP Server Configuration Example ................................................... 187
Figure 98 DHCP: Relay ......................................................................................... 188
Figure 99 DHCP Relay Network Example ............................................................. 189
Figure 100 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ................................................... 189
Figure 101 VRRP: Example 1 ............................................................................... 190
Figure 102 VRRP Status ....................................................................................... 191
Figure 103 VRRP Configuration: IP Interface ........................................................ 192
Figure 104 VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters ............................................ 194
Figure 105 VRRP Configuration: Summary ........................................................... 195
Figure 106 VRRP Configuration Example: One Virtual Router Network ............... 196
Figure 107 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A ................. 196
Figure 108 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B ................. 196
Figure 109 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Status on Switch A ..................................... 197
Figure 110 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Status on Switch B ...................................... 197
Figure 111 VRRP Configuration Example: Two Virtual Router Network ................ 197
Figure 112 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A .... 198
Figure 113 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B .... 198
Figure 114 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch A ...................................... 198
Figure 115 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch B ...................................... 198
Figure 116 Maintenance ....................................................................................... 200
Figure 117 Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................. 200
Figure 118 Restore Configuration .......................................................................... 201
Figure 119 Backup Configuration .......................................................................... 201
Figure 120 Load Factory Default: Conformation ................................................... 202
Figure 121 Load Factory Default: Start .................................................................. 202
Figure 122 Reboot System: Confirmation ............................................................. 202
Figure 123 Reboot System: Start .......................................................................... 203
Figure 124 Console Port Priority ........................................................................... 206

List of Figures

22

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 125 Access Control .................................................................................... 207
Figure 126 SNMP Management Model

................................................................ 207

Figure 127 Access Control: SNMP ........................................................................ 209
Figure 128 Access Control: Logins ........................................................................ 210
Figure 129 SSH Communication Example ............................................................. 211
Figure 130 How SSH Works ................................................................................... 211
Figure 131 HTTPS Implementation ........................................................................ 213
Figure 132 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer) ........................................ 214
Figure 133 Security Certificate 1 (Netscape) .......................................................... 214
Figure 134 Security Certificate 2 (Netscape) .......................................................... 215
Figure 135 Login Screen (Internet Explorer) .......................................................... 216
Figure 136 Login Screen (Netscape) ...................................................................... 216
Figure 137 Access Control: Service Access Control ............................................. 217
Figure 138 Access Control: Remote Management ................................................ 218
Figure 139 Diagnostic ............................................................................................ 220
Figure 140 Clustering Application Example ........................................................... 222
Figure 141 Cluster Management: Status ............................................................... 223
Figure 142 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ...... 224
Figure 143 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch ............... 225
Figure 144 Clustering Management Configuration ............................................... 226
Figure 145 MAC Table Flowchart .......................................................................... 228
Figure 146 MAC Table ........................................................................................... 229
Figure 147 IP Table Flowchart ............................................................................... 230
Figure 148 IP Table ............................................................................................... 231
Figure 149 ARP Table ........................................................................................... 233
Figure 150 Routing Table Status ........................................................................... 234
Figure 151 Initial Console Port Screen ................................................................... 237
Figure 152 CLI: Login Screen ................................................................................ 238
Figure 153 CLI Help: List of Commands: Example 1 ............................................ 239
Figure 154 CLI Help: List of Commands: Example 2 ............................................ 240
Figure 155 CLI Help: Detailed Command Information: Example 1 ........................ 240
Figure 156 CLI: Help: Detailed Command Information: Example 2 ....................... 240
Figure 157 CLI: History Command Example ......................................................... 241
Figure 158 CLI: write memory ............................................................................... 241
Figure 159 show system-information Command Example .................................... 268
Figure 160 show hardware-monitor Command Example ...................................... 269
Figure 161 show ip Command Example ................................................................ 270
Figure 162 show logging Command Example ....................................................... 270
Figure 163 show interface Command Example ..................................................... 271
Figure 164 show mac address-table Command Example ..................................... 272
Figure 165 ping Command Example ..................................................................... 272
Figure 166 traceroute Command Example ............................................................ 273
Figure 167 Enable RSTP Command Example ...................................................... 274

23

List of Figures

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 168 CLI: Backup Configuration Example ................................................... 274
Figure 169 CLI: Restore Configuration Example ................................................... 275
Figure 170 CLI: boot config Command Example ................................................... 275
Figure 171 CLI: reload config Command Example ................................................ 275
Figure 172 CLI: Reset to the Factory Default Example ......................................... 276
Figure 173 no mirror-port Command Example ...................................................... 276
Figure 174 no https timeout Command Example .................................................. 276
Figure 175 no trunk Command Example ............................................................... 277
Figure 176 no port-access-authenticator Command Example .............................. 278
Figure 177 no ssh Command Example ................................................................. 278
Figure 178 interface Command Example .............................................................. 279
Figure 179 interface Command Example .............................................................. 280
Figure 180 interface bpdu-control Command Example ......................................... 280
Figure 181 broadcast-limit Command Example .................................................... 281
Figure 182 bandwidth-limit Command Example .................................................... 281
Figure 183 mirror Command Example .................................................................. 282
Figure 184 gvrp Command Example ..................................................................... 283
Figure 185 ingress-check Command Example ...................................................... 283
Figure 186 frame-type Command Example ........................................................... 284
Figure 187 spq Command Example ...................................................................... 284
Figure 188 wrr Command Example ....................................................................... 285
Figure 189 egress set Command Example ........................................................... 285
Figure 190 qos priority Command Example .......................................................... 286
Figure 191 name Command Example ................................................................... 286
Figure 192 speed-duplex Command Example ...................................................... 286
Figure 193 Tagged VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ......................... 289
Figure 194 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ............................. 290
Figure 195 GARP STATUS Command Example ................................................... 290
Figure 196 GARP Timer Command Example ......................................................... 291
Figure 197 GVRP Status Command Example ....................................................... 291
Figure 198 vlan1q port default vid Command Example ......................................... 292
Figure 199 frame type Command Example ........................................................... 293
Figure 200 no gvrp Command Example ................................................................ 293
Figure 201 Modifying Static VLAN Example .......................................................... 294
Figure 202 no vlan Command Example ................................................................ 295
Figure 203 show vlan Command Example ............................................................ 296
Figure 204 Pop-up Blocker ..................................................................................... 299
Figure 205 Internet Options ................................................................................... 300
Figure 206 Internet Options .................................................................................... 301
Figure 207 Pop-up Blocker Settings ....................................................................... 302
Figure 208 Internet Options .................................................................................... 303
Figure 209 Security Settings - Java Scripting ......................................................... 304
Figure 210 Security Settings - Java ........................................................................ 305

List of Figures

24

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 211 Java (Sun) ............................................................................................ 306

25

List of Figures

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

List of Tables
Table 1 Front Panel ............................................................................................... 44
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs ...................................................................................... 48
Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview ....................................................... 52
Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details .............................................. 53
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links ............................................................................. 53
Table 6 Status ........................................................................................................ 67
Table 7 Status: Port Details .................................................................................... 68
Table 8 System Info ............................................................................................... 73
Table 9 General Setup ........................................................................................... 75
Table 10 Switch Setup ........................................................................................... 78
Table 11 IP Setup ................................................................................................... 80
Table 12 Port Setup ............................................................................................... 82
Table 13 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology ............................................................ 85
Table 14 VLAN: VLAN Status ................................................................................ 88
Table 15 VLAN: Static VLAN ................................................................................. 89
Table 16 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting ....................................................................... 90
Table 17 Port Based VLAN Setup ......................................................................... 93
Table 18 Static MAC Forwarding ........................................................................... 95
Table 19 FIltering ................................................................................................... 96
Table 20 STP Path Costs ...................................................................................... 98
Table 21 STP Port States ...................................................................................... 99
Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status ............................................................... 100
Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol: Configuration ................................................... 101
Table 24 Bandwidth Control ................................................................................... 105
Table 25 Broadcast Storm Control ......................................................................... 107
Table 26 Mirroring .................................................................................................. 109
Table 27 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch .......................................................... 111
Table 28 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch ........................................................... 111
Table 29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Status .............................................. 112
Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration ................................... 113
Table 31 Port Authentication: 802.1x ..................................................................... 117
Table 32 Port Authentication: RADIUS .................................................................. 118
Table 33 Port Security ........................................................................................... 121
Table 34 Classifier ................................................................................................. 123
Table 35 Classifier: Summary Table ...................................................................... 125
Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ..................................... 125
Table 37 Common IP Ports .................................................................................... 126
Table 38 Policy ...................................................................................................... 130

List of Tables

26

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 39 Policy: Summary Table ........................................................................... 131
Table 40 Physical Queue Priority ........................................................................... 134
Table 41 Queuing Method ..................................................................................... 136
Table 42 VLAN Tag Format ................................................................................... 139
Table 43 Single and Double Tagged 802.11Q Frame Format ................................ 140
Table 44 802.1Q Frame ......................................................................................... 140
Table 45 VLAN Stacking ........................................................................................ 141
Table 46 Multicast: Status ...................................................................................... 145
Table 47 Multicast: Setting ..................................................................................... 146
Table 48 Multicast: Setting: IGMP Filtering Profile ................................................ 148
Table 49 Multicast: Setting: MVR ........................................................................... 151
Table 50 Multicast: Setting: MVR: Group Configuration ........................................ 152
Table 51 Static Routing .......................................................................................... 156
Table 52 RIP .......................................................................................................... 159
Table 53 OSPF vs. RIP .......................................................................................... 160
Table 54 OSPF: Router Types ............................................................................... 160
Table 55 OSPF Status ........................................................................................... 162
Table 56 OSPF Status: Common Output Fields .................................................... 163
Table 57 OSPF Configuration: Activating and General Settings ........................... 164
Table 58 OSPF Configuration: Area Setup ............................................................ 165
Table 59 OSPF Configuration: Summary Table ..................................................... 166
Table 60 OSPF Interface ....................................................................................... 167
Table 61 OSPF Virtual Link .................................................................................... 169
Table 62 IGMP ....................................................................................................... 172
Table 63 DVMRP ................................................................................................... 176
Table 64 DVMRP: Default Timer Values ................................................................ 177
Table 65 IP Multicast ............................................................................................. 179
Table 66 DiffServ ................................................................................................... 181
Table 67 Default DSCP-IEEE802.1p Mapping ...................................................... 182
Table 68 DiffServ: DSCP Setting ........................................................................... 183
Table 69 DHCP: DHCP Server Status ................................................................... 185
Table 70 DHCP: Server ......................................................................................... 186
Table 71 DHCP: Relay ........................................................................................... 188
Table 72 VRRP Status ........................................................................................... 191
Table 73 VRRP Configuration: IP Interface ........................................................... 193
Table 74 VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters ................................................ 194
Table 75 VRRP Configuring: VRRP Parameters ................................................... 195
Table 76 Filename Conventions ............................................................................ 203
Table 77 Access Control Overview ........................................................................ 206
Table 78 SNMP Commands .................................................................................. 208
Table 79 SNMP Traps ............................................................................................ 208
Table 80 Access Control: SNMP ........................................................................... 209
Table 81 Access Control: Logins ........................................................................... 210

27

List of Tables

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 82 Access Control: Service Access Control ................................................. 217
Table 83 Access Control: Remote Management ................................................... 218
Table 84 Diagnostic ............................................................................................... 220
Table 85 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications ....................................... 222
Table 86 Cluster Management: Status ................................................................... 223
Table 87 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example ............................................... 225
Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration ................................................... 226
Table 89 MAC Table .............................................................................................. 229
Table 90 IP Table ................................................................................................... 231
Table 91 ARP Table ............................................................................................... 233
Table 92 Routing Table Status ............................................................................... 234
Table 93 Command Summary: User Mode .......................................................... 242
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode ........................................................ 243
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode .............................................. 247
Table 96 interface port-channel Commands .......................................................... 261
Table 97 interface route-domain Commands ......................................................... 264
Table 98 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands ........................................ 265
Table 99 Command Summary: mvr Commands .................................................... 266
Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Switch ........................................ 298
Table 101 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch ................................................. 298
Table 102 Troubleshooting the Password .............................................................. 306
Table 103 General Product Specifications ............................................................. 308
Table 104 Management Specifications .................................................................. 309
Table 105 Physical and Environmental Specifications ........................................... 310
Table 106 Classes of IP Addresses ....................................................................... 312
Table 107 Allowed IP Address Range By Class .................................................... 313
Table 108 “Natural” Masks .................................................................................... 313
Table 109 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ......................................................... 314
Table 110 Two Subnets Example ........................................................................... 314
Table 111 Subnet 1 ................................................................................................ 315
Table 112 Subnet 2 ................................................................................................ 315
Table 113 Subnet 1 ................................................................................................ 316
Table 114 Subnet 2 ................................................................................................ 316
Table 115 Subnet 3 ................................................................................................ 316
Table 116 Subnet 4 ................................................................................................ 317
Table 117 Eight Subnets ........................................................................................ 317
Table 118 Class C Subnet Planning ...................................................................... 317
Table 119 Class B Subnet Planning ....................................................................... 318

List of Tables

28

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

29

List of Tables

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Preface
Congratulations on your purchase of the GS-4012F/4024 Ethernet Switch.
This preface introduces you to the GS-4012F/4024 Ethernet Switch and discusses the
conventions of this User’s Guide. It also provides information on other related documentation.
There are two GS-4012F models. The GS-4012F DC model requires DC power supply input
of -48 VDC or -60 VDC, 1.2A Max. The GS-4012F AC model requires 100~240VAC/1.5A
power.

About This User's Guide
This manual is designed to guide you through the installation and configuration of your
GS-4012F/4024 for its various applications.

Related Documentation
• Web Configurator Online Help
Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary
information.
• ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional
support documentation.

Syntax Conventions
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters. “Select” or “Choose” means for
you to use one of the predefined choices.
• Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets. [ENTER] means the Enter, or
carriage return key; [ESC] means the Escape key and [SPACE BAR] means the Space Bar.
• Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma. For example, “click the Apple icon,
Control Panels and then Modem” means first click the Apple icon, then point your
mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem.
• For brevity’s sake, we will use “e.g.,” as a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” for
“that is” or “in other words” throughout this manual.
• The GS-4012F/4024 Ethernet Switch may be referred to as “the switch” in this User’s
Guide.

Preface

30

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Graphics Icons Key
GS-4012F/4024

Computer

Server

Computer

DSLAM

Gateway

Central Office/ ISP

Internet

Hub/Switch

User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. E-mail all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for
improvement to techwriters@zyxel.com.tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing
Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. Thank you.

31

Preface

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch.

1.1 Introduction
Your switch is a stand-alone layer-3 Gigabit Ethernet switch. By integrating router functions,
the switch performs wire-speed layer-3 routing in addition to layer-2 switching.
The GS-4024 comes with 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports and four Gigabit/mini-GBIC ports
The GS-4012F comes with with 12 min-GBIC slots and four Gigabit/mini-GBIC ports. There
are two GS-4012F models. The GS-4012F DC model requires DC power supply input of -48
VDC or -60 VDC, 1.2A Max. The GS-4012F AC model requires 100~240VAC/1.5A power.
With its built-in web configurator, managing and configuring the switch is easy. In addition,
the switch can also be managed via Telnet, any terminal emulator program on the console port,
or third-party SNMP management.

1.2 Software Features
This section describes the general software features of the switch.

IP Routing Domain
An IP interface (also known as an IP routing domain) is not bound to a physical port.
Configure an IP routing domain to allow the switch to route traffic between different
networks.

DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual
computers to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the
switch as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the switch provides the
TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you disable the DHCP service, you must have another
DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

32

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

VLAN
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into
multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can
belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from
devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.

VLAN Stacking
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that
enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service
provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094
customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different service, based on
specific VLANs, for many different customers.

Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
With DiffServ, the switch marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at
DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic
flow.

Classifier and Policy
You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a
classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address, port number or protocol type,
etc..

Queuing
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion.
Two scheduling services are supported: Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) and Weighted Round
Robin (WRR). This allows the switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each
individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.

Port Mirroring
Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in
order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port (the port you copy the traffic to)
without interference.

Static Route
Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP/IP
parameters manually.

33

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a session-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.

IGMP Snooping
The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to
ports that are members of that group; thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast
traffic passing through your switch.

IP Multicast
With IP multicast, the switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not
everybody. In addition, the switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLANaware by untagging (removing the VLAN tags) IP multicast packets.

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand
(MoD)) using multicast traffic across a network. MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to
be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs
and simplifies multicast group management.

RIP
RIP (Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information
with other routers.

OSPF
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) is a link-state protocol designed to distribute routing
information within an autonomous system (AS). An autonomous system is a collection of
networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information. OSPF is best
suited for large networks.

DVMRP
DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) is a protocol used for routing multicast
data within an autonomous system (AS). DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to
a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol (with IP Multicast support) and the IGMP
protocol.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

34

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), defined in RFC 2338, allows you to create
redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available.

STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) / RSTP (Rapid STP)
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches,
bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your
network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.

Link Aggregation
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity
link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed
links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.

Port Authentication and Security
For security, the switch allows authentication using IEEE 802.1x with an external RADIUS
server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses
and/or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch.

Maintenance and Management Features
• Access Control
You can specify the service(s) and computer IP address(es) to control access to the switch
for management.
• Cluster Management
Cluster management (also known as iStacking) allows you to manage switches through
one switch, called the cluster manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in
the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
• Configuration and Firmware Maintenance
You can backup or restore the switch configuration or upgrade the firmware on the
switch.

1.3 Hardware Features
This section describes the ports on the switch.

Mini-GBIC Slots
Install SPF transceivers in these slots to connect to other Ethernet switches at longer distances
than the Ethernet port.

35

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The ports allow the switch to connect to another WAN switch or daisy-chain to other switches.

Management Port
Connect a computer to this port for management purposes. You cannot access the network
through this port.

Console Port
Use the console port for local management of the switch.

Backup Power Supply Port
Connect a backup power supply device to this port to ensure uninterrupted network connection
in the event of a power failure.

Fans
The fans cool the switch sufficiently to allow reliable operation of the switch in even poorly
ventilated rooms or basements.

Power
The GS-4012F AC model and GS-4024 require 100~240VAC/1.5A power.The GS-4012F DC
model requires DC power supply input of -48 VDC or -60 VDC, 1.2A Max.

1.4 Applications
This section shows a few examples of using the switch in various network environments.

1.4.1 Backbone Application
In this application, the switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can
be expected in the near future.
The switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect
computers directly to the switch’s port or connect other switches to the switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the
network, simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print
servers etc.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

36

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 1 Backbone Application

1.4.2 Bridging Example
In this example application the switch connects different company departments (RD and
Sales) to the corporate backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server
and network bottlenecks. All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed
department servers via the switch. You can provide a super-fast uplink connection by using a
Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC port on the switch.
Moreover, the switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to
centralize multiple servers at a single location.
Figure 2 Bridging Application

1.4.3 High Performance Switching Example
The switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth. In the following
example, use trunking to connect these two networks.

37

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Switching to higher-speed LANs such as ATM (Asynchronous Transmission Mode) is not
feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and
adapter cards, restructuring your network and complex maintenance. The switch can provide
the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters
and switches. Moreover, the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely
communicate with each other.
Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application

1.4.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into
multiple logical networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one group. A station can
belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a station cannot directly talk to or hear from
stations that are not in the same group(s) unless such traffic first goes through a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 8, “VLAN,” on page 84.

1.4.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network
performance through reduced broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by
adding, moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

38

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 4 Tag-based VLAN Application

1.4.4.2 VLAN Shared Server Example
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server, as
shown in the following example. In this example, only ports that need access to the server
need belong to VLAN 1. Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too.
Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example

39

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and
Connection
This chapter shows you how to install the hardware and make port connections.
Note: Example graphics are shown.

2.1 Freestanding Installation
1 Make sure the switch is clean and dry.
2 Set the switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the
switch and the connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the switch to allow air circulation and the
attachment of cables and the power cord.
4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet.
5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the switch. These rubber feet help
protect the switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when
stacking.
Figure 6

Attaching Rubber Feet

Note: Do NOT block the ventilation holes. Leave space between devices when
stacking.
For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front
and 3.4 inches (8 cm) at the back of the switch. This is especially important for
enclosed rack installations.

Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection

40

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

2.2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the
installation steps.

2.2.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
Note: Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.

2.2.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it
contains.
• Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take
all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.

2.2.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch, lining up the four screw holes on
the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch.
Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets

2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting
bracket holes into the switch.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the
switch.
4 You may now mount the switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.

2.2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1 Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the switch) on one side of the
rack, lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the
rack.

41

Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack

2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting
bracket holes into the rack.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.

Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection

42

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

43

Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make
the hardware connections.

3.1 Front Panel Connection
The figure below shows the front panel of the switch.
Figure 9 Front Panel: GS-4024

Figure 10 Front Panel: GS-4012F

The following table describes the port labels on the front panel.
Table 1 Front Panel
PORT

DESCRIPTION

100/1000
Mbps RJ-45
Gigabit
Ethernet
Ports

Connect these ports to a computer, a hub, an Ethernet switch or router.

Mini-GBIC
slots

Use mini-GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber-optical connections to backbone
Ethernet switches (see Section 3.1.3 on page 45 for instructions).

Gigabit/miniGBIC ports

Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high-bandwidth backbone network Ethernet
switches or use them to daisy-chain other switches.
Alternatively, use mini-GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber-optical connections to
backbone Ethernet switches.

MGMT

Connect to a computer using an RJ-45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the
switch.

CONSOLE

Only connect this port if you want to configure the switch using the command line
interface (CLI) via the console port.

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

44

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

3.1.1 Console Port
For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured
to the following parameters:
•
•
•
•

VT100 terminal emulation
9600 bps
No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
No flow control

Connect the male 9-pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch. Connect the
female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.

3.1.2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The GS-4024 has 24 100/1000Mbps auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Gigabit Ethernet ports.
In 10/100/1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet, the speed can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the
duplex mode can be half duplex (for 100 Mbps) or full duplex.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed and duplex
mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or
crossover Ethernet cable.

3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are:
• Speed: Auto
• Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: on

3.1.3 SFP Slots
The GS-4012F comes with 12 SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) slots for mini-GBIC
(Gigabit Interface Converter) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that houses a
transmitter and a receiver. The switch does not come with transceivers. You must use
transceivers that comply with the SFP transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the
SFF committee’s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
The switch has four pairs of Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports. The mini-GBIC ports have
priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-GBIC port and the corresponding
Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled.
You can change transceivers while the switch is operating. You can use different transceivers
to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.

45

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
Note: To avoid possible eye injury, do NOT look into an operating fiber-optic module’s
connectors.

3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a mini-GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Example

2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3 The switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that
it is functioning properly.
Figure 12

Installed Transceiver

3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a mini-GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1 Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example

2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot.

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

46

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 14 Transceiver Removal Example

3.2 Rear Panel
The following figure shows the rear panel of the switch. The rear panel contains the ventilation
holes, a connector for external backup power supply (BPS), the power receptacle and the
power switch (for DC model).
The following figure shows the rear panel of the switch. The rear panel contains a connector
for backup power supply (BPS) and the power receptacle.
Figure 15 Rear Panel: GS-4012F

Figure 16 Rear Panel: GS-4024

Figure 17 Read Panel: GS-4012F (DC Model)

3.2.1 Power Connector
Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel.
The GS-4012F DC unit requires DC power supply input of –48 VDC or -60 VDC, 1.2A Max.
To connect the power to the switch, insert the female end of power cord to the power
receptacle on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a power
outlet. Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans.

47

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

3.2.2 External Backup Power Supply Connector
The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply. The
backup power supply automatically provides power to the switch in the event of a power
failure. Once the switch receives power from the backup power supply, it will not
automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed.

3.3 Front Panel LEDs
The LEDs are located on the front panel. The following table describes the LEDs on the front
panel.
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs
LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

BPS

Green

Blinking

The system is receiving power from the backup power supply.

On

The backup power supply is connected and active.

Off

The backup power supply is not ready or not active.

On

The system is turned on.

Off

The system is off.

Blinking

The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.

On

The system is on and functioning properly.

Off

The power is off or the system is not ready/malfunctioning.

On

There is a hardware failure.

Off

The system is functioning normally.

Blinking

The port is sending/receiving data.

On

The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up when the 100 LED is
on.

Off

No Ethernet device is connected to this port or the port is
transmitting at 100 Mbps.

Blinking

The port is sending/receiving data.

On

The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up when the 1000 LED
is on.

Off

No Ethernet device is connected to this port or the port is
transmitting at 1000 Mbps.

On

The port has a successful connection.

Off

No Ethernet device is connected to this port.

Blinking

The port is sending or receiving data.

Off

The port is not sending or receiving data.

PWR
SYS

ALM

Green
Green

Red

Gigabit Ethernet Ports
1000

100

Green

Amber

Mini-GBIC (SFP) Slots
LNK
ACT

Green
Green

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

48

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs (continued)
LED

COLOR

STATUS

DESCRIPTION

Green

On

The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.

Blinking

The port is receiving or transmitting data. at 10 Mbps.

Off

The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.

On

The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.

Blinking

The port is receiving or transmitting data. at 100 Mbps.

Off

The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.

MGMT Port
10

100

49

Amber

Chapter 3 Hardware Overview

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 4
The Web Configurator
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.

4.1 Introduction
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy switch setup
and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape
Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by
default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Web configurator screens are similar for the switch models described in this
guide. GS-4012F screens are shown.

4.2 System Login
1 Start your web browser.
2 Type “http://” and the IP address of the switch (for example, the default is 192.168.1.1) in
the Location or Address field. Press [ENTER].
3 The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default
password is 1234. The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time
server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

50

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 18 Web Configurator: Login

4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.

4.3 The Status Screen
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status)

51

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.

Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING

ADVANCED
APPLICATION

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

IP APPLICATION

MANAGEMENT

52

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub-links.
Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details
BASIC SETTING
System Info
General Setup
Switch Setup
IP Setup
Port Setup

ADVANCED
APPLICATION
VLAN
VLAN Status
VLAN Port Setting
Static VLAN
Static MAC Forwarding
Filtering
Spanning Tree Protocol
Status
Spanning Tree
Protocol Configuration
Bandwidth Control
Broadcast Storm Control
Mirroring
Link Aggregation
Link Aggregation
Protocol Status
Link Aggregation
Port Authentication
RADIUS
802.1x

IP APPLICATION

MANAGEMENT

Static Routing
RIP
OSPF Status
OSPF Configuration
OSPF Interface
OSPF Virtual Link
IGMP
DVMRP
IP Multicast
DiffServ
DSCP Setting
DHCP Server Status
DHCP Server
DHCP Relay
VRRP
Status
VRRP Configuration

Maintenance
Firmware Upgrade
Restore Configuration
Backup Configuration
Load Factory Default
Reboot System
Access Control
SNMP
Logins
Service Access Control
Remote Management
Cluster Management Status
Cluster Management
Configuration
MAC Table
IP Table
ARP Table
Routing Table

Port Security
Classifier
Policy Rule
Queuing Method
VLAN Stacking
Multicast
IGMP Filtering Profile
MVR
Group Configuration

The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links
LINK

DESCRIPTION

Basic Settings

53

System Info

This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware
monitoring information.

General Setup

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification
information about the switch.

Switch Setup

This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such
as VLAN type, MAC address learning, IGMP snooping, GARP and priority queues.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK

DESCRIPTION

IP Setup

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address, subnet
mask (necessary for switch management) and DNS (domain name server) and set
up to 64 IP routing domains.

Port Setup

This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch
ports.

Advanced Application
VLAN

This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN
(depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu).

Static MAC
Forwarding

This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a
port. These static MAC addresses do not age out.

Filtering

This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.

Spanning Tree
Protocol

This link takes you to screens where you can configure the STP/RSTP to prevent
network loops.

Bandwidth
Control

This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed
from specified source(s) to specified destination(s).

Broadcast Storm
Control

This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.

Mirroring

This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to
another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without
interference

Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to
form one logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port
Authentication

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service), a protocol for user authentication that allows
you to use an external server to validate an unlimited number of users.

Port Security

This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and
set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port.

Classifier

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to group packets
based on the specified criteria.

Policy Rule

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to perform
special treatment on the grouped packets.

Queuing Method

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated
queue weights for each port.

VLAN Stacking

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking.

Multicast

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features
and create multicast VLANs.

IP Application
Static Route

This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes. A static route
defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters
manually.

RIP

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP (Routing
Information Protocol) direction and versions.

OSPF

This link takes you to screens where you can view the OSPF status and configure
OSPF settings.

IGMP

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP settings.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

54

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK

DESCRIPTION

DVMRP

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP (Distance
Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) settings.

IP Multicast

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to remove VLAN
tags from IP multicast packets on an out-going port.

DiffServ

This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ, configure marking
rules and set DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.

DHCP

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP settings.

VRRP

This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for
your network.

Management
Maintenance

This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration
file maintenance as well as reboot the system.

Access Control

This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password
and configure SNMP and remote management.

Diagnostic

This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port(s).

Cluster
Management

This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management
and view its status.

MAC Table

This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses (and types)
of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.

IP Table

This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses (and types) of
devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.

ARP Table

This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses – IP
address resolution table.

Routing Table

This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table.

4.3.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator
password. Click Management, Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen.

55

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password

4.4 Switch Lockout
Note: You cannot log into the switch using the same administrator account
concurrently on different IP routing domains.
You could lock yourself (and all others) out from the switch by:
1 Deleting all IP routing domains.
2 Deleting all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the
management port of the switch.
3 Filtering all traffic to the CPU port.
4 Disabling all ports.
5 Misconfiguring the text configuration file.
6 Forgetting the password and/or IP address.
7 Preventing all services from accessing the switch.
8 Changing a service port number but forgetting it.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch.

4.5 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the switch or forget the administrator password, you
will need to reload the factory-default configuration file or reset the switch back to the factory
defaults.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

56

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

4.5.1 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the
factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations
and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit, no
parity, one stop bit and flow control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and
the IP address to 192.168.1.1.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See
Section 3.1.1 on page 45 for details.
2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the
switch’s power, you will see the initial screen.
3 When you see the message “Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3
seconds ...” press any key to enter debug mode.
4 Type atlc after the “Enter Debug Mode” message.
5 Wait for the “Starting XMODEM upload” message before activating XMODEM
upload on your terminal.
6 After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the switch.
Figure 21 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port
Bootbase Version: V1.0 | 11/26/2004 15:56:35
RAM:Size = 64 Mbytes
FLASH: Intel 32M
ZyNOS Version: V3.60(LL.0)b2 | 01/18/2005 00:39:28
Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds.
....................
Enter Debug Mode
GS-4012F> atlc
Starting XMODEM upload (CRC mode)....
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Total 393216 bytes received.
Erasing..
................................................................
OK
GS-4012F> atgo

The switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password
of “1234”.

4.6 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password
again after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for
security reasons.

57

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 22 Web Configurator: Logout Screen

4.7 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some
supplementary information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that
screen.

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

58

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

59

Chapter 4 The Web Configurator

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 5
Initial Setup Example
This chapter shows how to set up the switch for an example network.

5.1 Overview
The following lists the configuration steps for the example network:
•
•
•
•
•

Configure an IP interface
Configure DHCP server settings
Create a VLAN
Set port VLAN ID
Enable RIP

5.1.1 Configuring an IP Interface
On a layer-3 switch, an IP interface (also known as an IP routing domain) is not bound to a
physical port. The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of
255.255.255.0.
In the example network, since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the
switch, you don’t need to create an IP interface for it. However, if you want to have the Sales
network on a different routing domain, you need to create a new IP interface. This allows the
switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks.
Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example: IP Interface

1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management. Make sure
your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port.

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

60

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

2 Open your web browser and enter 192.168.0.1 (the default MGMT port IP address) in
the address bar to access the web configurator. See Section 4.2 on page 50 for more
information.
3 Click Basic Setting and IP
Setup in the navigation panel.
4 Configure the related fields in the
IP Setup screen.
For the Sales network, enter
192.168.2.1 as the IP address and
255.255.255.0 as the subnet
mask.
5 In the VID field, enter the ID of
the VLAN group to which you
want this IP interface to belong.
This is the same as the VLAN ID
you configure in the Static
VLAN screen.
6 Click Add.

5.1.2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings
You can set the switch to assign network information (such as the IP address, DNS server, etc.)
to DHCP clients on the network.
For the example network, configure two DHCP client pools on the switch for the DHCP
clients in the RD and Sales networks.
1 In the web configurator, click IP
Application and DHCP in the
navigation panel and click the
Server link.
2 In the DHCP Server screen,
specify the ID of the VLAN to
which the DHCP clients belong,
the starting IP address pool,
subnet mask, default gateway
address and the DNS server
address(es).
3 Click Add to save the settings.

61

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

5.1.3 Creating a VLAN
VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. You can
do this with port-based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members.
In this example, you want to configure port 10 as a member of VLAN 2.
Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN

1 Click Advanced
Application and VLAN in
the navigation panel and
click the Static VLAN link.

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

62

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

2 In the Static VLAN screen,
select ACTIVE, enter a
descriptive name in the Name
field and enter 2 in the VLAN
Group ID field for the Sales
network.
Note: The VLAN Group ID field in
this screen and the VID field
in the IP Setup screen refer
to the same VLAN ID.
3 Since the Sales network is
connected to port 10 on the
switch, select Fixed to configure
port 10 to be a permanent
member of the VLAN only.
4 To ensure that VLAN-unaware
devices (such as computers and
hubs) can receive frames
properly, clear the TX Tagging check box to set the switch to remove VLAN tags before
sending.
5 Click Add to save the settings.

5.1.4 Setting Port VID
Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames
are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
In the example network, configure 2 as the port VID on port 10 so that any untagged frames
received on that port get sent to VLAN 2.
Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID

63

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

1 Click Advanced
Applications and VLAN
in the navigation panel.
Then click the VLAN
Port Setting link.
2 Enter 2 in the PVID field
for port 10 and click
Apply to save the
settings.

5.1.5 Enabling RIP
To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains,
enable RIP (Routing Information Protocol) in the RIP screen.
1 Click IP Application and RIP in the navigation panel.
2 Select Both in the Direction field
to set the switch to broadcast and
receive routing information.
3 In the Version field, select RIP-1
for the RIP packet format that is
universally supported.
4 Click Apply to save the settings.

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

64

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

65

Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 6
System Status and Port
Statistics
This chapter describes the system status (web configurator home page) and port details
screens.

6.1 Overview
The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each
port showing statistical details.

6.2 Port Status Summary
To view the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status
screen as shown next.
Figure 26 Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

66

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 6 Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was
started.
Port

This identifies the Ethernet port. Click a port number to display the Port Details
screen (refer to Figure 27 on page 68).

Link

This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M
for 1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex). It also shows
the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports.

State

This field displays the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) state of the port. See the
chapter on STP for details on STP states.

LACP

This fields displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been
enabled on the port.

TxPkts

This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port.

RxPkts

This field shows the number of received frames on this port.

Errors

This field shows the number of received errors on this port.

Tx KB/s

This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.

Rx KB/s

This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.

Up Time

This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has
been up.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt system statistic polling.

Clear Counter

Select a port from the Port drop-down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase
the recorded statistical information for that port.

6.2.1 Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the
switch.

67

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 27 Status: Port Details

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Status: Port Details
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Port Info
Link

This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for
1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex). It also shows the
cable type (Copper or Fiber).

Status

This field shows the training state of the ports. The states are FORWARDING
(forwarding), which means the link is functioning normally or STOP (the port is stopped
to break a loop or duplicate path).

LACP

This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.

TxPkts

This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port

RxPkts

This field shows the number of received frames on this port

Errors

This field shows the number of received errors on this port.

Tx KB/s

This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.

Rx KB/s

This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

68

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 7 Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL
Up Time

DESCRIPTION
This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.

Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
TX Packet

This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast)
transmitted.

Multicast

This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.

Broadcast

This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.

Pause

This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.

Tagged

This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted.

Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast)
received.
Multicast

This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.

Broadcast

This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.

Pause

This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.

Tagged

This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags received.

Control

This field shows the number of control packets received (including those with CRC
error) but it does not include the 802.3x Pause packets.

TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single

This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited
by exactly one collision.

Multiple

This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited
by more than one collision.

Excessive

This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions.
Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the
retransmission count is reset.

Late

This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the
packets have already been transmitted.

Error Packet

The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in
error.

RX CRC

This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check)
error(s).

Length

This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.

Runt

This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64
octets), including the ones with CRC errors.

Distribution

69

64

This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64
octets in length.

65-127

This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length.

128-255

This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length.

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 7 Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

256-511

This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length.

512-1023

This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length.

1024-1518 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length.
Giant

This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the
maximum frame size.

Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop

Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

70

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

71

Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 7
Basic Setting
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup, Switch Setup, IP
Setup and Port Setup screens.

7.1 Overview
The System Info screen displays general switch information (such as firmware version
number) and hardware polling information (such as fan speeds). The General Setup screen
allows you to configure general switch identification information. The General Setup screen
also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an
external server when you turn on your switch. The real time is then displayed in the switch
logs. The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features. The
IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address in each routing domain, subnet
mask(s) and DNS (domain name server) for management purposes.

7.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown.
You can check the firmware version number and monitor the switch temperature, fan speeds
and voltage in this screen.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

72

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 28 System Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 System Info
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

System Name

This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes.

ZyNOS F/W
Version

This field displays the version number of the switch 's current firmware including the
date created.

Ethernet
Address

This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the switch.

Hardware Monitor

73

Temperature
Unit

The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit
(Centigrade or Fahrenheit) in this field.

Temperature

MAC, CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the switch
printed circuit board.

Current

This shows the current temperature in degrees centigrade at this sensor.

MAX

This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.

MIN

This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.

Threshold

This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.

Status

This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those
above.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 8 System Info (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Fan Speed
(RPM)

A properly functioning fan is an essential component (along with a sufficiently
ventilated, cool operating environment) in order for the device to stay within the
temperature threshold. Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and
reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown.

Current

This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).

MAX

This field displays this fan's maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM).

MIN

This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM). "<41" is displayed for speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).

Threshold

This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.

Status

Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed. Error
indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed.

Voltage(V)

The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and
reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range.

Current

This is the current voltage reading.

MAX

This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.

MIN

This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.

Threshold

This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the switch still
works.

Status

Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point;
otherwise Error is displayed.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt statistic polling.

7.3 General Setup
Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

74

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 29 General Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 General Setup

75

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

System Name

Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to
32 printable characters; spaces are allowed.

Location

Enter the geographic location (up to 30 characters) of your switch.

Contact Person's
Name

Enter the name (up to 30 characters) of the person in charge of this switch.

Login
Precedence

Use this drop-down list box to select which database the switch should use (first) to
authenticate an administrator (user for switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen. The
RADIUS is an external server. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have
set up the corresponding database correctly first.
Select Local Only to have the switch just check the administrator accounts
configured in the Access Control Logins screen.
Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the administrator accounts
configured in the Access Control Logins screen. If the user name is not found, the
switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server. You need to
configure Port Authentication Radius first.
Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the
specified RADIUS server for a login username and password.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 9 General Setup (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Use Time Server
when Bootup

Enter the time service protocol that a timeserver sends when you turn on the switch.
Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to
find a protocol that works. The main differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the switch displays the day,
month, year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is
recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time
zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds
since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the
switch, the time and date will be reset to 2000-1-1 0:0.

Time Server IP
Address

Enter the IP address of your timeserver. The switch searches for the timeserver for
up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen
will appear locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.

Current Time

This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).

New Time
(hh:min:ss)

Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears
in the Current Time field after you click Apply.

Current Date

This field displays the date you open this menu.

New Date (yyyymm-dd)

Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in
the Current Date field after you click Apply.

Time Zone

Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly
known as GMT, Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list
box.

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

7.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into
multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can
belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from
devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security
among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from
accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the
printers and hard disks of another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast
packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a
specific broadcast domain.
Note: VLAN is unidirectional; it only governs outgoing traffic.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

76

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

See Chapter 8 on page 84 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.

7.5 IGMP Snooping
A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets
transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP
multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group
registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the
switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from
IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that
group. The switch discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not
know. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly
reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch.

7.6 Switch Setup Screen
Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown. The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port
Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen. Refer to the chapter on VLAN.
Figure 30 Switch Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen

77

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

.
Table 10 Switch Setup
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

VLAN Type

Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on
whether you choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen.
See Chapter 8 on page 84 for more information.

Bridge Control
Protocol
Transparency

Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols (STP for
example). You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen.

MAC Address
Learning

MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address
learning to occur on a port, the port must be active.

Aging Time

Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC
addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be
relearned).

GARP Timer: Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join
message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message
terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See the chapter on VLAN
setup for more background information.
Join Timer

Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each
port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and
65535 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background
information.

Leave Timer

Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger
than Join Timer.

Leave All Timer

Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in
milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be
larger than Leave Timer.

Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that
contains bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default
priority of the ingress port. Use the next two fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue
mapping.
The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the switch, traffic
assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the
network is congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d
standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
Level 7

Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.

Level 6

Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).

Level 5

Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.

Level 4

Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.

Level 3

Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.

Level 2

This is for “spare bandwidth”.

Level 1

This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

78

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 10 Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Level 0

Typically used for best-effort traffic.

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

7.7 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device, the default domain name
server and add IP domains.

7.7.1 IP Interfaces
The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP
address is 192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP
address. The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
On the switch, as a layer-3 device, an IP address is not bound to any physical ports. Since each
IP address on the switch must be in a separate subnet, the configured IP address is also known
as IP interface (or routing domain). In addition, this allows routing between subnets based on
the IP address without additional routers.
You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address
ranges for the domains do not overlap. To change the IP address of the switch in a routing
domain, simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet.

79

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 31 IP Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 IP Setup
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Default
Gateway

Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.

Domain Name
Server

DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to
use a domain name instead of an IP address.

Default
Management

Specify which traffic flow (In-Band or Out-of-band) the switch is to send packets
originating from itself (such as SNMP traps) or packets with unknown source.
Select Out-of-band to have the switch send the packets to the management port
labelled MGMT. This means that device(s) connected to the other port(s) do not
receive these packets.
Select In-Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the
management port (labelled MGMT) to which connected device(s) do not receive these
packets.

Management IP Address
Use these fields to set the settings for the out-of-band management port.
IP Address

Enter the out-of-band management IP address of your switch in dotted decimal
notation. For example, 192.168.0.1.

IP Subnet
Mask

Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

80

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 11 IP Setup (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Default
Gateway

Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.0.254

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

IP Interface
Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the switch.
IP Address

Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
192.168.1.1. This is the IP address of the switch in an IP routing domain.

IP Subnet
Mask

Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation. For
example, 255.255.255.0.

VID

Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs.

Add

Click Add to save the new rule to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at
the bottom of the screen.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

Index

This field displays the index number of an entry.

IP Address

This field displays IP address of the switch in the IP domain.

Subnet Mask

This field displays the subnet mask of the switch in the IP domain.

VID

This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the switch.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Note: Deleting all IP subnets locks you out from the switch.
Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

7.8 Port Setup
Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration
screen.

81

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 32 Port Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Port Setup
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Port

This is the port index number.

Active

Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A
port must be enabled for data transmission to occur.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to nine printable characters) that identifies this port.

Type

This field displays 10/100/1000M for the Gigabit Ethernet/ mini-GBIC ports or 1000M
for the mini-GBIC ports.

Speed/Duplex

Select the speed and the duplex mode of the connection on this port. Choices are
Auto, 10M/Half Duplex, 10M/Full Duplex, 100M/Half Duplex, 100M/Full Duplex
and 1000M/Full Duplex.
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port
automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the switch negotiates with the peer
automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port
does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the switch determines the
connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode.
When the switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed
and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the
settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.

Flow Control

A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer
memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate
transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow
control in half duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the
sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port
memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision"
signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending
port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to
enable it.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

82

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 12 Port Setup (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

802.1P Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag.
See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 78 for more information.

83

BPDU Control

Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port. You must activate bridging
control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first.
Select Peer to process any BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received on this port.
Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port.
Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port.
Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

Chapter 7 Basic Setting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 8
VLAN
The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup
screen. This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs.

8.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were
created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The
VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches
need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an
untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within the
type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information, starts
after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet
switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not
be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID,
giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID
are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a
priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the
ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to
identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN
configurations are 4,094.
TPID
2 Bytes

User Priority
3 Bits

CFI
1 Bit

VLAN ID
12 bits

8.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
VLAN group ID (or VID) is a unique number than identifies a VLAN. A port VID (PVID) is
the VID associated to a physical port. A PVID defines the VLAN group to which a port
belongs.
Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame
from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the switch first
decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame
from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the switch first
decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's
default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.

Chapter 8 VLAN

84

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The egress (outgoing) port(s) of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination
MAC address and the VID of the frame. For a unicast frame, the egress port (based on the
destination MAC address) must be a member of the VID, also; otherwise, the frame is
blocked. A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the
system) is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port
itself), thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain.
Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on an individual
VLAN and port basis (remember that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on
the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged
frame; otherwise, it is transmitted as an untagged frame.

8.2 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across
switches.

8.2.1 GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and deregister attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a
protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific
application, for example, GVRP.

8.2.1.1 GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join
message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All
message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.

8.2.2 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for
switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this
function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
Table 13 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology

85

VLAN PARAMETER TERM

DESCRIPTION

VLAN Type

Permanent VLAN

This is a static VLAN created manually.

Dynamic VLAN

This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/
deregistration process.

Chapter 8 VLAN

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 13 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology (continued)
VLAN PARAMETER TERM

DESCRIPTION

VLAN Administrative
Control

Registration Fixed

Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.

Registration
Forbidden

Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the
specified VLAN.

Normal Registration

Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.

Tagged

Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing
frames transmitted.

Untagged

Ports belonging to the specified don't tag all outgoing
frames transmitted.

Port VID

This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that
this port received.

Acceptable frame
type

You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged
incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a
port.

Ingress filtering

If set, the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs
that do not have this port as a member

VLAN Tag Control

VLAN Port

8.3 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to
pass through that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices
without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2)
on devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on
all intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN
group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch
you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically
allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those
switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 33 Port VLAN Trunking

8.4 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen.

Chapter 8 VLAN

86

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 34 Switch Setup: Select VLAN Type

8.5 Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the
specified VID.

8.5.1 Static VLAN Status
Click Advanced Application, VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status
screen as shown next.
Figure 35 VLAN: VLAN Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

87

Chapter 8 VLAN

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 14 VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

The Number of
VLAN

This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch.

Index

This is the VLAN index number.

VID

This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the VLAN Setup
screen.

Port Number

This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is
marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN
are marked as “–“.

Elapsed Time

This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static
VLAN was set up.

Status

This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch; dynamically using GVRP or
statically, that is, added as a permanent entry.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt polling statistics.

Change Pages

Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous/next screen if all status
information cannot be seen in one screen.

8.5.2 Configure a Static VLAN
To configure a static VLAN, click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the
screen as shown next.

Chapter 8 VLAN

88

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 36 VLAN: Static VLAN

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 15 VLAN: Static VLAN

89

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

ACTIVE

Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 12 printable ASCII characters) for the VLAN group
for identification purposes.

VLAN Group ID

Enter the VLAN ID for this VLAN group; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.

Port

The port number identifies the port you are configuring.

Control

Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is
the default selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.

Tagging

Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames (that were
previously untagged) transmitted with this VLAN Group ID.

Add

Click Add to add the settings as a new entry in the summary table below.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields.

Clear

Click Clear to start configuring the screen again.

VID

This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the
VLAN settings.

Active

This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.

Chapter 8 VLAN

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 15 VLAN: Static VLAN (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

8.5.3 Configure VLAN Port Settings
To configure the VLAN settings on a port, click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN
Status screen.
Figure 37 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

GVRP

GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a
way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the
network.
Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch.

Port Isolation

Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management
port but not communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while
only the CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the
most secure.

Port

This field displays the port number.

Ingress Check

Select this check box to activate ingress filtering.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.

Chapter 8 VLAN

90

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 16 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

PVID

Specify the VLAN group ID (or VID) that will be added to untagged packets on the
port. For example, if port 10’s PVID is 2, then all untagged traffic on port 10 will
belong to (and be sent to) VLAN 2.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.

GVRP

Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port.

Acceptable Frame Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All and Tag Only.
Type
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on
this port. This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will
be dropped.
VLAN Trunking

Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not
ports directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN
groups to pass through the switch.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again.

8.6 Port-based VLANs
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the
destination MAC address and its associated port.
Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if
you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference
rooms in a hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port
through which a data packet leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1.
You cannot change it.
In screens (such as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter
1 as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN
with all Ethernet ports.

8.6.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN
from the navigation panel to display the next screen.

91

Chapter 8 VLAN

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 38 Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)

Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 8 VLAN

92

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

]
Table 17 Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no
virtual LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most
flexible but also the least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU
management port and cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are
selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting
but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens
as mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting
incoming or outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.

93

Incoming

These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through
which a data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each
other, you must define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row
denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port).
CPU refers to the switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot
be managed from that port.

Outgoing

These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through
which a data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each
other, you must define the egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the switch
management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form
a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again.

Chapter 8 VLAN

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 9
Static MAC Forward Setup
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.

9.1 Overview
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table.
Static MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are
setting static MAC addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC
address table on a port to access the switch. See Chapter 17 on page 120 for more information
on port security.

9.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
Click Advanced Applications, Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display
the configuration screen as shown. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the
summary table for the settings.
Figure 40 Static MAC Forwarding

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup

94

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 18 Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule
without deleting it by clearing this check box.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes for this rule.

MAC Address

Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal
character pairs.

Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.

95

VID

Enter the VLAN identification number.

Port

Select a port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be
automatically forwarded.

Add

After you set the fields above, click Add to insert a new rule.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields.

Clear

Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Index

Click an index number to modify the settings.

Active

This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or
not (No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this rule.

MAC Address

This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification
number to which the MAC address belongs.

Port

This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be
forwarded.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 10
Filtering
This chapter discusses static MAC address filtering.

10.1 Overview
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and/or destination
MAC addresses and VLAN group (ID).

10.2 Configure a Filtering Rule
Click Advanced Application, Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown
next. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the summary table for the settings.
Figure 41 Filtering

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 19 FIltering
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate
a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box.

Name

Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for
identification purpose only.

Chapter 10 Filtering

96

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 19 FIltering (continued)

97

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Action

Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address (specified in the
MAC field). The switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address (specified in
the MAC field). The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC
address specified in the MAC field.

MAC

Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character
pairs.

VID

Type the VLAN group identification number.

Add

Click Add to save the new rule to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at the
bottom of the screen.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

Clear

Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.

Index

This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the
settings.

Active

This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose
only.

MAC
Address

This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification
number to which the MAC address belongs.

Action

This field displays the filter action.

Delete

Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es) in the Delete column.

Chapter 10 Filtering

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 11
Spanning Tree Protocol
This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).

11.1 STP/RSTP Overview
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches,
bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your
network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allow faster
convergence of the spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STPonly aware bridges). In RSTP, topology change information is directly propagated throughout
the network from the device that generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is
required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then
notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering
database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.

11.1.1 STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree; it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value
(MAC address).
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. It is assigned
according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the higher
the cost.
Table 20 STP Path Costs
RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED
VALUE
RANGE

ALLOWED
RANGE

Path Cost 4Mbps

250

100 to 1000

1 to 65535

Path Cost 10Mbps

100

50 to 600

1 to 65535

Path Cost 16Mbps

62

40 to 400

1 to 65535

Path Cost 100Mbps

19

10 to 60

1 to 65535

Path Cost 1Gbps

4

3 to 10

1 to 65535

Path Cost 10Gbps

2

1 to 5

1 to 65535

LINK SPEED

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

98

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root.
It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is
no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree
network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the
root among the bridges connected to the LAN.

11.1.2 How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and
the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that
participate in STP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports,
eliminating any possible network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the
bridged LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
(Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello
BPDU after a predefined interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root
bridge is down. This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the
network to re-establish a valid network topology.

11.1.3 STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go
directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Table 21 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled

STP is disabled (default).

Blocking

Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.

Listening

All BPDUs are received and processed.

Learning

All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the
learning process but not forwarded.

Forwarding

All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and
forwarded.

11.2 STP Status
Click Advanced Application, Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next.

99

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 42 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Spanning Tree
Protocol

This field displays Running if STP is activated. Otherwise, it displays Down.

Configuration

Click Configuration to configure STP settings. Refer to Section 11.2.1 on page
101.

Bridge

Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this
switch. This switch may also be the root bridge.

Bridge ID

This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC
address. This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root
switch.

Hello Time
(second)

This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a
configuration message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and
Forwarding Delay

Max Age (second)

This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a
configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.

Forwarding Delay
(second)

This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that
is, listening to learning to forwarding).

Cost to Bridge

This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch.

Port ID

This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch
must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.

Topology Changed This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Times
Time Since Last
Change

This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

100

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may
change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then
clicking Set Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling.

11.2.1 Configure STP
To configure STP, click the Configuration link in the Spanning Tree Protocol screen as
shown next.
Figure 43 Spanning Tree Protocol: Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol: Configuration

101

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Status

Click Status to display the Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen (see Figure 42
on page 100).

Active

Select this check box to activate STP. Clear this checkbox to disable STP.

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol: Configuration (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Bridge Priority

Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port.
The switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root
switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC
address will then become the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list
box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time,
Max Age and Forwarding Delay.

Hello Time

This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.

Max Age

This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU
before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports)
should receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information
(provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it
is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to
the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.

Forwarding Delay

This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states.
This delay is required because every switch must receive information about
topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs
time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state;
otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30
seconds.
As a general rule:
2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)

Port

This field displays the port number.

Active

Select this check box to activate STP on this port.

Priority

Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a
loop in a switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The
allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.

Path Cost

Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
assigned according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher
the cost - see Table 20 on page 98 for more information.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

102

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

103

Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 12
Bandwidth Control
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed from specific
source(s) to specified destination(s) using the Bandwidth Control screen.

12.1 Introduction to Bandwidth Control
Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or outgoing traffic flows on a port.

12.1.1 CIR and PIR
The Committed Information Rate (CIR) is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic
flow on a port. The Peak Information Rate (PIR) is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the
incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion.
The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth. If the CIR is
reached, packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR. When network congestion occurs, packets
through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop.
Note: The CIR should be less than the PIR.
The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.

12.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to display
the configuration screen.

Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control

104

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 44 Bandwidth Control

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 24 Bandwidth Control

105

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch.

Port

This field displays the port number.

Active

Make sure to select this check box to activate bandwidth control on a port.

Commited
Rate

Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the
incoming traffic flow on a port. The commit rate should be less than the peak rate. The
sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.

Peak Rate

Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming
traffic flow on a port.

Egress Rate

Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in megabits per second (Mbps) for the outgoing traffic flow on a port. Enter a number between 1 and 1000.

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 13
Broadcast Storm Control
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.

13.1 Overview
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup
failure (DLF) packets the switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number
of allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent
packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in
your network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port.

13.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Click Advanced Application, Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display
the screen as shown next.
Figure 45 Broadcast Storm Control

Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control

106

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Broadcast Storm Control

107

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the switch.

Port

This field displays a port number.

Broadcast (pkt/s)

Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per
second.

Multicast (pkt/s)

Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per
second.

DLF (pkt/s)

Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets
the port receives per second.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 14
Mirroring
This chapter shows you how to configure mirroring on the switch.

14.1 Overview
Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in
order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port (the port you copy the traffic to)
without interference.

14.2 Port Mirroring Configuration
Click Advanced Application, Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the configuration
screen.
You must first select a monitor port. A monitor port is a port that copies the traffic of another
port. After you select a monitor port, configure a mirroring rule in the related fields
Figure 46 Mirroring

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.

Chapter 14 Mirroring

108

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 26 Mirroring

109

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Clear this check box to deactivate port mirroring on the switch.

Monitor
Port

The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail
without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Select this port from this
drop-down list box.

Port

This field displays the port number.

Mirrored

Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.

Direction

Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror. Choices are Egress (outgoing), Ingress
(incoming) and Both.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again.

Chapter 14 Mirroring

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 15
Link Aggregation
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higherbandwidth link.

15.1 Overview
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity
link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed
links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group
is one logical link containing multiple ports.

15.1.1 Dynamic Link Aggregation
The switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port
trunking.
The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802.3ad standard. This standard describes the
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP), which is a protocol that dynamically creates and
manages trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with
the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port
redundancy, that is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become
operational without user intervention. Please note that:
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the
ports for LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode
and flow control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing
network topology loops.

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

110

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

15.1.2 Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information1:
Table 27 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS

KEY

PORT PRIORITY

PORT NUMBER

0000

0000

00

0000

00-00-00-00-00

Table 28 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS

KEY

PORT PRIORITY

PORT NUMBER

0000

0000

00

0000

00-00-00-00-00

15.2 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application, Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. The Link
Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default.
Figure 47 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

1.

111

Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual
port.

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link
containing multiple ports.

Aggregator ID

Refer to Section 15.1.2 on page 111 for more information on this field.

Enabled Port

These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the
trunk group.

Synchronized
Ports

These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk
group.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt statistic polling.

15.3 Link Aggregation Setup
Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the
screen shown next.

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

112

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 48 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

113

Active

Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).

System
Priority

LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest
system priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the
LACP “server”. The LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a
number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol
(LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority level.

Group ID

The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing
multiple ports

Active

Select this option to activate a trunk group.

Dynamic
(LACP)

Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk.

Port

This field displays the port number.

Group

Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in
order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond
after three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a
short timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are
removed from the trunk group as soon as possible. Select either 1 second or 30
seconds.
Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

114

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

115

Chapter 15 Link Aggregation

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 16
Port Authentication
This chapter describes the 802.1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection
setup.

16.1 Overview
IEEE 802.1x is an extended authentication protocol2 that allows support of RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and
accounting management on a network RADIUS server.

16.1.1 RADIUS
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol
used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an
internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence,
RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central
location.
Figure 49 RADIUS Server

16.2 Configuring Port Authentication
For network security, enable port authentication to check the identity of the user before access
to the network is allowed. The switch authenticates users against the remote RADIUS server
you specify.
To enable port authentication:
• activate IEEE802.1x security (both on the switch and the port(s))
• configure the RADIUS server settings.
2.

At the time of writing, only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports it. See the Microsoft web site
for information on other Windows operating system support. For other operating systems, see its documentation.
If your operating system does not support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client software.

Chapter 16 Port Authentication

116

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Click Advanced Application, Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
Figure 50 Port Authentication

16.2.1 Activating IEEE 802.1x Security
From the Port Authentication screen, display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 51 Port Authentication: 802.1x

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Port Authentication: 802.1x
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the switch.

Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the switch
before configuring it on each port.
Port

This field displays a port number.

Active

Select this checkbox to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first
allow 802.1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port.

Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and
password to stay connected to the port.

117

Chapter 16 Port Authentication

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 31 Port Authentication: 802.1x (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re-enter his or her username and password to stay
Timer
connected to the port.
Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

16.2.2 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings
From the Port Authentication screen, click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Figure 52 Port Authentication: RADIUS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Port Authentication: RADIUS
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Authentication Server
IP Address

Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.

UDP Port

The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not
change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.

Shared Secret

Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared
between the external RADIUS server and the switch. This key is not sent over the
network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 16 Port Authentication

118

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

119

Chapter 16 Port Authentication

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 17
Port Security
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.

17.1 Overview
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured
static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure
static MAC address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable Port Security together
with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts.

17.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application, Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 53 Port Security

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 17 Port Security

120

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 33 Port Security
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable port security on the switch.

Port

This field displays a port number.

Active

Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port. The switch
forwards packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port.
Packets with no matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The switch forwards all
packets on this port.

Address
Learning

MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic. For MAC address learning
to occur on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.

Limited Number Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned
of Learned MAC on a port. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with
Address
these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device
would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC
address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is
from 0 to 16K. “0” means this feature is disabled, so the switch will learn MAC
addresses up to the global limit of 16K.

121

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 17 Port Security

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 18
Classifier
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch.

18.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum
delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all
traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a
reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical
application such as video-on-demand.
A layer-2 classifier groups traffic according to the Ethernet type, VLAN group, MAC address
and/or port number. A layer-3 classifier groups traffic according to the IP address and/or TCP/
UDP protocol number.
Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow (refer
to Chapter 19 on page 128 to configure policy rules).

18.2 Configuring the Classifier
Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier, you can
specify actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that match the rules. To configure policy
rules, refer to Chapter 19 on page 128.
Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen as shown.

Chapter 18 Classifier

122

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 54 Classifier

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 34 Classifier
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this option to enable this rule.

Name

Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for
identification purpose only.

Packet Format Specify the format of the packet. Choices are All, 802.3 tagged, 802.3 untagged,
Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged.
A value of 802.3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802.3
standards.
A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894,
Ethernet II encapsulation.

123

Chapter 18 Classifier

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 34 Classifier (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer-2 classifier.
VLAN

Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify
the source VLAN ID in the field provided.

Priority

Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select MAC and specify a priority
level in the field provided.

Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in
hexadecimal value. Refer to Table 36 on page 125 for information.
Select All if you don’t know.
Source
MAC Address

Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format
(six hexadecimal character pairs).

Port

Select the port to which the rule should be applied. You may choose one port only or all
ports (All Ports).

Destination
MAC Address

Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a destination, select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid
MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs).

Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier.
DSCP

Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.

IP Protocol

Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal
value. Refer to Table 37 on page 126 for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the switch will
pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections.

Source
IP Address/
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Address Prefix Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Socket
Number

Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field
before you configure the socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the
second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.

Destination
IP Address/
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Address Prefix Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Socket
Number

Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field
before you configure the socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the
second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.

Add

Chapter 18 Classifier

Click Add to save the changes.

124

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 34 Classifier (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

18.3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the
bottom of the Classifier screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index
field. When two rules conflict with each other, a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer
rule.
Figure 55 Classifier: Summary Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Classifier: Summary Table
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.

Active

This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.

Rule

This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol
number.
Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number

125

ETHERNET TYPE

PROTOCOL NUMBER

IP ETHII

0800

X.75 Internet

0801

NBS Internet

0802

ECMA Internet

0803

Chaosnet

0804

X.25 Level 3

0805

Chapter 18 Classifier

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number (continued)
ETHERNET TYPE

PROTOCOL NUMBER

XNS Compat

0807

Banyan Systems

0BAD

BBN Simnet

5208

IBM SNA

80D5

AppleTalk AARP

80F3

Some of the most common IP ports are:
Table 37 Common IP Ports
PORT NUMBER

PORT NAME

21

FTP

23

Telnet

25

SMTP

53

DNS

80

HTTP

110

POP3

18.4 Classifier Example
The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all
traffic from MAC address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
After you have configured a classifier, you can configure a policy (in the Policy screen) to
define action(s) on the classified traffic flow.

Chapter 18 Classifier

126

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 56 Classifier: Example

127

Chapter 18 Classifier

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 19
Policy Rule
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.

19.1 Overview
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to Chapter
18 on page 122 for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the
requested treatment in the network.

19.1.1 DiffServ
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that
they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route
based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points
(DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServcompliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points
without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition,
applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the
traffic is going.

19.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service
(TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field
which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that nonDiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each
packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic
can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to
the DSCP values and the configured policies.

19.2 Configuring Policy Rules
Note: You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to Chapter
18 on page 122 for more information.

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

128

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Click Advanced Applications and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
Figure 57 Policy

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

129

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 38 Policy
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this option to enable the policy.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Classifier(s)

This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen (refer
to Chapter 18 on page 122).
Select the classifier(s) to which this policy rule applies. To select more than one
classifier, press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.

Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you
configure in the Action field.
General
VLAN ID

Specify a VLAN ID number.

Egress Port

Select an outgoing port.

Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port.
Outgoing
packet format Otherwise, select Untag. The switch removes the VLAN tag from the packets.
for Egress Port
Priority

Specify a priority level.

DSCP

Specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63.

TOS

Specify the type of service (TOS) priority level.

Metering

You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow. Traffic that
exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested)
is called out-of-profile traffic.

Bandwidth

Specify the bandwidth in mega bits per second (Mbps). Enter a number between 1 and
1023.

Out-of-Profile
DSCP

Specify a new DSCP number (between 0 and 63) if you want to replace or remark the
DSCP number for out-of-profile traffic.

Action
Specify the action(s) the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Forwarding

Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard packet to drop the packets.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain
the frames that were marked to be dropped before.

Priority

Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1 priority to replace the 802.1 priority field with the value
you set in the Priority field.
Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue.
Select Replace the 802.1 priority field with IP TOS value to replace the 802.1
priority field with the value you set in the TOS field.

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

130

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 38 Policy (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

DiffServ

Select No change to keep the TOS and/or DSCP fields in the packets.
Select Set the packet’s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in
the TOS field.
Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802.1 priority value to replace the TOS field
with the value you configure in the Priority field.
Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the
value you configure in the DSCP field.

Outgoing

Select Send the packet to the mirror port to sent the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port.
Select Send the matching frames (broadcast or DLF, multicast, marked for
dropping or to be sent to the CPU) to the egress port to send the broadcast,
multicast, DLF, marked-to-drop or CPU frames to the egress port.
Select Set the packet’s VLANID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you
configure in the VLANID field.

Metering

Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s) then set the actions
to be taken on out-of-profile packets.

Out-of-profile
Action

Select the action(s) to be performed for out-of-profile traffic.
Select Drop the packet to discard the out-of-profile traffic.
Select Change the DSCP Value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in
the Out-of-Profile DSCP field above.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue
the frames that are marked to be dropped.

Add

Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

19.3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the
bottom of the Policy screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Figure 58 Policy: Summary Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Policy: Summary Table

131

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.

Active

This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 39 Policy: Summary Table (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Classifier(s)

This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

19.4 Policy Example
The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit
bandwidth and discard out-of-profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example
classifier (refer to Section 18.4 on page 126).

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

132

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 59 Policy Example

133

Chapter 19 Policy Rule

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 20
Queuing Method
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.

20.1 Overview
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use
the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also
Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Setup for related
information.
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each
individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
The switch has eight physical queues, Q0 to Q7. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 has the
lowest.
Table 40 Physical Queue Priority
QUEUE

PRIORITY

Q7

8 (Highest)

Q6

7

Q5

6

Q4

5

Q3

4

Q2

3

Q1

2

Q0

1 (Lowest)

20.1.1 Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ)
Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the
switch, traffic on the highest priority queue, Q3 is transmitted first. When that queue empties,
traffic on the next highest-priority queue, Q2 is transmitted until Q2 empties, and then traffic
is transmitted on Q1 and so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower
priority queues never gets sent. SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network
requirements.

Chapter 20 Queuing Method

134

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

20.1.2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port
has more traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of
the incoming traffic on that port. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue
is given an equal amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on,
depending on the number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue
is empty.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin
scheduling, but services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you
configure in the queue Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is
activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get
more service than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in
that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues
that have not yet emptied.

20.2 Configuring Queuing
Click Advanced Application, Queuing Method in the navigation panel.
Figure 60 Queuing Method

135

Chapter 20 Queuing Method

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Queuing Method
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Port

This label shows the port you are configuring.

Method

Select SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing) or WRR (Weighted Round Robin).
Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. When the
highest priority queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q3
has the highest priority and Q0 the lowest.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) services queues on a rotating basis
based on their queue weight (the number you configure in the queue Weight field).
Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights.

Q0~Q7 Weight
%

When you select WRR, enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the
different traffic queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get
more service than queues with smaller weights.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Calculate

Click Calculate to make sure the WFQ queuing weights total to 100%; if not an error
message is displayed.

Chapter 20 Queuing Method

136

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

137

Chapter 20 Queuing Method

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 21
VLAN Stacking
This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch. See the chapter on
VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN

21.1 Introduction
A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers
VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned) VLAN ID, within its network.
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that
enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service
provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094
customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different service, based on
specific VLANs, for many different customers.
A service provider’s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple
applications. A service provider’s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports
for these applications. The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer.
Therefore, there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers, so traffic from different customers
is kept separate.

21.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example
In the following example figure, both A and B are Service Provider’s Network (SPN)
customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively. Both
have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group. The service provider can separate these
two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to
distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the
data frames leave the network.

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

138

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 61 VLAN Stacking Example

21.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles
Each port can have three VLAN stacking “roles”, Normal, Access Port and Tunnel (the latter
is for Gigabit ports only).
• Select Normal for “regular” (non-VLAN stacking) IEEE 802.1Q frame switching.
• Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the
VLAN stacking example figure). The incoming frame is treated as "untagged", so a
second VLAN tag (outer VLAN tag) can be added.
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose
Normal or Access Port.
• Select Tunnel (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service
provider's network. All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single
service provider's VLAN (using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID).
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel.

21.3 VLAN Tag Format
A VLAN tag (service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802.1Q) consists of the
following three fields.
Table 42 VLAN Tag Format
Type

139

Priority

VID

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the
frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. SP TPID (Service Provider Tag Protocol
Identifier) is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type. Many vendors use 0x8100 or
0x9100.
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) is the customer IEEE 802.1Q tag.
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port, then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to
all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking
example figure).
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel, then the switch only adds the SP TPID tag to
all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking
example figure) that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch. (If
an incoming frame’s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch, then the
switch will not add the tag.)
Priority refers to the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic
based on the class of service (CoS) the customer has paid for.
• On the switch, configure priority level of inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup
screen.
• "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VID is the VLAN ID. SP VID is the VID for the second (service provider’s) VLAN tag.

21.3.1 Frame Format
The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame, a single-tagged 802.1Q frame (customer)
and a “double-tagged” 802.1Q frame (service provider) is shown next.
Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen.
Table 43 Single and Double Tagged 802.11Q Frame Format
DA
DA

DA SA

SA

SPTPID Priority VID

SA

Len/Etype Data

FCS Untagged
Ethernet frame

TPID

Priority VID

Len/Etype Data

FCS IEEE 802.1Q
customer
tagged frame

TPID

Priority VID

Len/Etype Data

FCS Double-tagged
frame

Table 44 802.1Q Frame
DA

Destination Address

Priority

802.1p Priority

SA

Source Address

Len/Etype Length and type of
Ethernet frame

(SP)TPID (Service Provider) Tag Protocol IDentifier

Data

Frame data

VID

FCS

Frame Check Sequence

VLAN ID

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

140

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

21.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking
Click Advanced Applications and then VLAN Stacking in the navigation panel to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 62 VLAN Stacking

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 VLAN Stacking

141

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch.

SP TPID

SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the
frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop-down
list box or select Others and then enter a four-digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to
0xFFFF. 0x denotes a hexadecimal number. It does not have to be typed in the Others text
field.

Port

The port number identifies the port you are configuring.

Role

Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received (or transmitted) on this port with
VLAN stacking tags. Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored.
Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received
on this port. Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider's
network.
Select Tunnel (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service
provider's network.
In order to support VLAN stacking on a port, the port must be able to allow frames of 1526
Bytes (1522 Bytes + 4 Bytes for the second tag) to pass through it.

SPVID

SPVID is the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). Enter the service provider ID
(from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port. See Chapter 8 on page 84 for more
background information on VLAN ID.

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 45 VLAN Stacking (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Priority

Select a number from the drop-down list box to configure the priority level of the outer tag.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.

Note: Configure the priority level of the inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port
Setup screen.
Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

142

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

143

Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 22
Multicast
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.

22.1 Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1
recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets
to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a session-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112 and
RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively.

22.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts
(multicast group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic
receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0
to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by
IANA for special purposes (see the IANA web site for more information).

22.1.2 IGMP Filtering
With IGMP filtering, you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. This
allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information
distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per-port basis by
configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port.

22.1.3 IGMP Snooping
A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets
transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP
multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group
registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the
switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.

Chapter 22 Multicast

144

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from
IGMP snooping) to ports that are members of that group. The switch discards multicast traffic
destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no additional
network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your
switch.

22.2 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Applications and Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen
shows the multicast group information.
Figure 63 Multicast: Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Multicast: Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This is the index number of the entry.

VID

This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.

Port

This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.

Multicast Group

This field displays IP multicast group addresses.

22.2.1 Multicast Setting
Click Advanced Applications, Multicast and the Multicast Setting link to display the screen
as shown.

145

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 64 Multicast: Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Multicast: Setting
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

IGMP Snooping

Select Active to enable IGMP snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to
ports that are members of that group

IGMP Filtering

Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to limit the IGMP groups a subscriber on a
port can join.

Unknown
Multicast Frame

Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast
frame. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Forwarding to send the
frame(s) to the destination device.

Port

This field displays the port number.

Immed. Leave

Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when
an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.

Group Limited

Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.

Max. Group No.

Select this option and enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups this
port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in the specified number of
multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is dropped on this port.

IGMP Filtering
Profile

Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select
Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.

Chapter 22 Multicast

146

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 47 Multicast: Setting (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

IGMP Querier
Mode

The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast
router (or server). The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP
query port.
Select Auto to have the switch dynamically change to using the port as an IGMP
query port after it receives IGMP query packets.
Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select
this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The
switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The
switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

22.2.2 IGMP Filtering Profile
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups. This allows you to
have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group. You can configure an IGMP filter
profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service (like a SIP server for
example). Within a profile, configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address
ranges. Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports (in the Multicast Setting screen) that
are allowed to use the service.
Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the Multicast
Setting link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 65 Multicast: Setting: IGMP Filtering Profile

147

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Multicast: Setting: IGMP Filtering Profile
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Profile Name

Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.

Note: To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have
already added, enter the same profile name and specify a
different IP multicast address range.
Start Address

Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that
you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile.

End Address

Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to
belong to the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address
and End Address fields.

Add

Click Add to save the settings to the switch.

Clear

Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.

Profile Name

This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.

Start Address

This field displays the start of the multicast address range.

End Address

This field displays the end of the multicast address range.

Delete

To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that
you want to remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the
Delete Rule column, then click the Delete button.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Rule check boxes.

22.3 MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand
(MoD)) that use multicast traffic across a service provider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on
the network. While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscriber
to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves
bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies
multicast group management.
You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR. However, MVR only responds to IGMP join
and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR. Join and
leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN (1, 2 and 3)
information is hidden from the streaming media server, S. In addition, the multicast VLAN
information is only visible to the switch and S.

Chapter 22 Multicast

148

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 66 MVR Network Example

22.3.1 Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a
multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic. Once configured, the
switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated
multicast group.

22.3.2 MVR Modes
You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices
(such as multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices
to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the
receiver ports.
In compatible mode, the switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must
manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.

22.3.3 How MVR Works
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as
a computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S, via the
switch. Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on
the switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the
switch to join the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the
configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch, an entry is created in the forwarding
table on the switch. This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for
the specified multicast traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is
sent to the switch to leave the multicast group. The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the
receiver port (in this case, a DSL port on the switch). If there is another subscriber device
connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list
of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic. Otherwise, the switch removes the receiver
port from the forwarding table.

149

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 67 MVR Multicast Television Example

22.4 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source
port for each multicast VLAN.
Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the Multicast
Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next.
Note: You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on
the switch.
Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you
create a multicast VLAN in this screen.
Figure 68 Multicast: Setting: MVR

Chapter 22 Multicast

150

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 49 Multicast: Setting: MVR
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be
shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Multicast VLAN
ID

Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN.

Mode

Specify the MVR mode on the switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible.
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast
VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports.

Port

This field displays the port number on the switch.

Source Port

This field is applicable for Ethernet ports.
Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives
multicast traffic.

Receiver Port

Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast
traffic.

None

Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR. No MVR multicast traffic
is sent or received on this port.

Tagging

Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames
transmitted.

Add

Click Add to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes.

VLAN

This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.

Active

This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.

Mode

This field displays the MVR mode.

Source Port

This field displays the source port number(s).

Receiver Port

This field displays the receiver port number(s).

Delete

To delete the group(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the group(s) that you
want to remove in the Delete column, then click the Delete button.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

22.5 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data
sent to this multicast group.
Configure MVR IP multicast group address(es) in the Group Configuration screen. Click
Group Configuration in the MVR screen.

151

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Note: A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast
group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
Figure 69 MVR: Group Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Multicast: Setting: MVR: Group Configuration
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Multicast
VLAN ID

Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the dropdown list box.

Name

Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.

Start Address

Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal
notation.
Refer to Section 22.1.1 on page 144 for more information on IP multicast addresses.

End Address

Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one
IP address for a multicast group.
Refer to Section 22.1.1 on page 144 for more information on IP multicast addresses.

Add

Click Add to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes.

MVLAN

This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.

Start Address

This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group.

End Address

This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group.

Delete

Select Delete All and click Delete to remove all entries from the table.
Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.

Cancel

Select Cancel to clear the checkbox(es) in the table.

Chapter 22 Multicast

152

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

22.5.1 MVR Configuration Example
The following figure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the switch belong to
VLAN 1. In addition, port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast
traffic (the News and Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S. Computers
A, B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic.
Figure 70 MVR Configuration Example

To configure the MVR settings on the switch, create a multicast group in the MVR screen and
set the receiver and source ports.
Figure 71 MVR Configuration Example

To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast
group settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example
where two multicast groups (News and Movie) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.

153

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 72 MVR Group Configuration Example

Figure 73 MVR Group Configuration Example

Chapter 22 Multicast

154

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

155

Chapter 22 Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 23
Static Route
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.

23.1 Configuring
Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP/IP
parameters manually.
Click IP Application, Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 74 Static Routing

The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 51 Static Routing
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Destination IP
Address

This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is
always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use
a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network
number to be identical to the host ID.

IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway IP
Address

Chapter 23 Static Route

Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your
switch that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on
the same segment as your switch.

156

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 51 Static Routing (continued)

157

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Metric

The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses
hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected
networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need
not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good
number.

Add

Click Add to insert a new static route.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

Index

This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static
route entry.

Active

This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is
deactivated.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose
only.

Destination
Address

This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.

Subnet Mask

This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.

Gateway
Address

This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate
neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination.

Metric

This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

Chapter 23 Static Route

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 24
RIP
This chapter shows you how to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol).

24.1 Overview
RIP (Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information
with other routers. The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets.
When set to:
• Both - the switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP
information that it receives.
• Incoming - the switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets
received.
• Outgoing - the switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets
received.
• None - the switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets
received.
The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the
switch sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but
RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you
have an unusual network topology.
Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that
RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting.

24.2 Configuring
Click IP Application, RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. You cannot
manually configure a new entry. Each entry in the table is automatically created when you
configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen (refer to Section 7.7 on page 79).

Chapter 24 RIP

158

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 75 RIP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 RIP

159

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable RIP on the switch.

Index

This field displays the index number of an IP interface.

Network

This field displays the IP interface configured on the switch.
Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains.

Direction

Select the RIP direction from the drop-down list box. Choices are Outgoing, Incoming,
Both and None.

Version

Select the RIP version from the drop-down list box. Choices are RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP2M.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again.

Chapter 24 RIP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 25
OSPF
This chapter describes the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing protocol and shows you
how to configure OSPF.

25.1 Overview
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) is a link-state protocol designed to distribute routing
information within an autonomous system (AS). An autonomous system is a collection of
networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information.
OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector-space routing protocols (such as RIP).
The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP.
Table 53 OSPF vs. RIP
OSPF

RIP

Network Size

Large

Small (with up to 15 routers)

Metrics

Bandwidth, hop count, throughput, round
trip time and reliability.

Hop count

Convergence

Fast

Slow

25.1.1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas
An OSPF autonomous system can be divided into logical areas. Each area represents a group
of adjacent networks. All areas are connected to a backbone (also known as area 0). The
backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas. A stub area, at the edge of an
AS, is not a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area.
The following table describes the four classes of OSPF routers.
Table 54 OSPF: Router Types
TYPE

DESCRIPTION

Internal Router (IR)

An Internal or intra-area router is a router in an area.

Area Border Router (ABR) An Area Border Router connects two or more areas.
Backbone Router (BR)

A backbone router has an interface to the backbone.

AS Boundary Router

An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in other
ASes.

Chapter 25 OSPF

160

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following figure depicts an OSPF network example. The backbone is area 0 with a
backbone router. The internal routers are in area 1 and 2. The area border routers connect area
1 and 2 to the backbone.
Figure 76 OSPF Network Example

25.1.2 How OSPF Works
Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build synchronized link state database within
the same AS or area. They do this by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor
(layer 3) devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions (DDs) to create the link
state database. The link state database in constantly updated through LSAs (Link State
Advertisements).
The link state database contains records of router IDs, their associated links and path costs.
Each device can then use the link state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least
cost paths to network destinations.

25.1.3 Interfaces and Virtual Links
An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 device and an OSPF network. An interface has
state information, an IP address and subnet mask associated with it. When you configure an
OSPF interface, you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an
area.
You can configure a virtual link to establish/maintain connectivity between a non-backbone
area and the backbone. The virtual ink must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the nonbackbone area and the backbone.

25.1.4 Configuring OSPF
To configure OSPF on the switch, do the following tasks
1 Enable OSPF
2 Create OSPF areas
3 Create and associate interface(s) to an area
4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity.

161

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

25.2 OSPF Status
To view current OSPF status, click IP Application, OSPF in the navigation panel to display
the screen as shown next.
Figure 77 OSPF Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 OSPF Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

OSPF

This field displays whether OSPF is activated (Running) or not (Down).

Interface

The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface(s) on the switch.

Neighbor

The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF
network.

Link State
Database

The text box displays information in the link state database which contains data in the
LSAs.

Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop

Chapter 25 OSPF

Click Stop to end OSPF status polling.

162

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following table describes some common output fields.
Table 56 OSPF Status: Common Output Fields
FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Interface
Internet Address

This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing domain.

Area

This field displays the area ID.

Router ID

This field displays the unique ID of the switch.

Transmit Delay

This field displays the transmission delay in seconds.

State

This field displays the state of the switch (backup or DR (designated router)).

Priority

This field displays the priority of the switch. This number is used in the designated
router election.

Designated
Router

This field displays the router ID of the designated router.

Backup
Designated
Router

This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router.

Time Intervals
Configured

This field displays the time intervals (in seconds) configured.

Neighbor Count

This field displays the number of neighbor routers.

Adjacent
Neighbor Count

This field displays the number of neighbor router(s) that is adjacent to the switch.

Neighbor
Neighbor ID

This field displays the router ID of the neighbor.

Pri

This field displays the priority of the neighbor. This number is used in the
designated router election.

State

This field displays the state of the neighbor (backup or DR (designated router)).

Dead Time

This field displays the dead time in seconds.

Address

This field displays the IP address of a neighbor.

Interface

This field displays the MAC address of a device.

Link State Database
Link ID

This field displays the ID of a router or subnet.

ADV Router

This field displays the IP address of the layer-3 device that sends the LSAs.

Age

This field displays the time (in seconds) since the last LSA was sent.

Seq #

This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA.

Checksum

This field displays the checksum value of the LSA.

Link Count

This field displays the number of links in the LSA.

25.3 Enabling OSPF and General Settings
To activate OSPF and set general settings, click IP Application, OSPF and the
Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen.

163

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 78 OSPF Configuration: Activating and General Settings

The follow table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 57 OSPF Configuration: Activating and General Settings
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

OSPF is disabled by default. Select this option to enable it.

Router ID

Router ID uniquely identifies the switch in an OSPF. Enter a unique ID (that uses the
format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation) for the switch.

Redistribute
Route

Route redistribution allows your switch to import and translate external routes learned
through other routing protocols (RIP and Static) into the OSPF network transparently.

Active

Select this option to activate route redistribution for routes learn through the selected
protocol.

Type

Select 1 for routing protocols (such as RIP) whose external metrics are directly
comparable to the internal OSPF cost. When selecting a path, the internal OSPF cost is
added to the AB boundary router to the external metrics.
Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF
cost. In this case, the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to
a destination.

Metric Value Enter a route cost (between 0 and 16777214).
Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again.

Chapter 25 OSPF

164

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

25.4 Configuring OSPF Areas
To ensure that the switch receives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices,
activate authentication. The OSPF supports three authentication methods:
• None – no authentication is used.
• Simple – authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password.
• MD5 – authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password.
To configure an area, set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen.
Figure 79 OSPF Configuration: Area Setup

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 58 OSPF Configuration: Area Setup

165

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Area ID

Enter a 32-bit ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation) that
uniquely identifies an area.
A value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that this is a backbone (also known as Area 0). You can
create only one backbone area on the switch.

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 58 OSPF Configuration: Area Setup (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Authentication Select an authentication method (Simple or MD5) to activate authentication. Select
None to disable authentication.
Interface(s) and virtual interface(s) must use the same authentication method as the
associated area.
Stub Area

Select this option to set the area as a stub area.
If you enter 0.0.0.0 in the Area ID field, the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored.

No Summary

Select this option to set the switch to not send/receive LSAs.

Default Route Specify a cost (between 0 and 16777214) used to add a default route into a stub area
Cost
for routes which are external to an OSPF domain. If you do not set a route cost, no
default route is added.
Add

Click Add to apply the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

25.4.1 Viewing OSPF Area Information Table
The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF
areas you have configured.
Figure 80 OSPF Configuration: Summary Table

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 59 OSPF Configuration: Summary Table
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number of an area.

Name

This field displays the descriptive name of an area.

Area ID

This field displays the area ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal
notation) that uniquely identifies an area.
An area ID of 0.0.0.0 indicates the backbone.

Authentication This field displays the authentication method used (None, Simple or MD5).
Stub Network

This field displays whether an area is a stub network (Yes) or not (No).

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

Chapter 25 OSPF

166

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

25.5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces
To configure an OSPF interface, first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen (see
Section 7.7 on page 79 for more information). Once you create an IP routing domain, an OSPF
interface entry is automatically created.
In the OSPF Configuration screen, click Interface to display the OSPF Interface screen.
Figure 81 OSPF Interface

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 OSPF Interface
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Network

Select an IP interface.

Area ID

Select the area ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation) of
an area to associate the interface to that area.

Authentication

Note: OSPF Interface(s) must use the same authentication method
within the same area.
Select an authentication method. Choices are Same-as-Area, None (default), Simple
and MD5.
To participate in an OSPF network, you must set the authentication method and/or
password the same as the associated area.
Select Same-as-Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set
the related fields when necessary.
Select None to disable authentication. This is the default setting.
Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through
this interface using simple password authentication.
Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets
transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication.

Key ID

167

When you select MD5 in the Authentication field, specify the identification number of
the authentication you want to use.

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 60 OSPF Interface (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Key

When you select Simple in the Authentication field, enter a password eight-character
long. Characters after the eighth character will be ignored.
When you select MD5 in the Authentication field, enter a password 16-character long.

Cost

The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table. Enter a number between 0
and 65535.

Add

Click Add to apply the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

Index

This field displays the index number for an interface.

Network

This field displays the IP interface information.

Area ID

This field displays the area ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal
notation) of an area to associate the interface to that area.

Authentication This field displays the authentication method used (Same-as-Area, None, Simple or
MD5).
Key ID

When the Authentication field displays MD5, this field displays the identification
number of the key used.

Cost

This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the routing table.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again.

25.6 OSPF Virtual Links
Configure and view virtual link settings in the OSPF Virtual Link screen.
In the OSPF Configuration screen, click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next.

Chapter 25 OSPF

168

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 82 OSPF Virtual Link

The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 61 OSPF Virtual Link
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Area ID

Select the area ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation)
of an area to associate the interface to that area.

Peer Router ID

Enter the ID of a peer border router.

Authentication

Note: Virtual interface(s) must use the same authentication method
within the same area.
Select an authentication method. Choices are Same-as-Area, None (default),
Simple and MD5.
To exchange OSPF packets with peer border router, you must set the authentication
method and/or password the same as the peer border router.
Select Same-as-Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set
the related fields when necessary.
Select None to disable authentication. This is the default setting.
Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using
a simple password.
Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using
MD5 authentication.

169

Key ID

When you select MD5 in the Authentication field, specify the identification number of
the authentication you want to use.

Key

When you select Simple in the Authentication field, enter a password eightcharacter long.
When you select MD5 in the Authentication field, enter a password 16-character
long.

Add

Click Add to apply the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

Index

This field displays an index number of an entry.

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 61 OSPF Virtual Link (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Name

This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link.

Peer Router ID

This field displays the ID (that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal
notation) of a peer border router.

Authentication

This field displays the authentication method used (Same-as-Area, None, Simple or
MD5).

Key ID

When the Authentication field displays MD5, this field displays the identification
number of the key used.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

Chapter 25 OSPF

170

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

171

Chapter 25 OSPF

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 26
IGMP
This chapter shows you how to configure IGMP.

26.1 Overview
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a session-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC
2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively.
The switch supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up,
the switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the
switch periodically updates this information.

26.2 Configuring
Click IP Application, IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP
Setup screen (refer to Section 7.7 on page 79).
Figure 83 IGMP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 IGMP
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable IGMP on the switch.

Note: You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time.
Refer to the section on IGMP snooping.
Index

Chapter 26 IGMP

This field displays an index number of an entry.

172

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 62 IGMP (continued)

173

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Network

This field displays the IP domain configured on the switch.
Refer to Section 7.7 on page 79 for more information on configuring IP domains.

Version

Select an IGMP version from the drop-down list box. Choices are IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2 and
None.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again.

Chapter 26 IGMP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 27
DVMRP
This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it.

27.1 Overview
DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) is a protocol used for routing multicast
data within an autonomous system (AS). This DVMRP implementation is based on draft-ietfidmr-dvmrp-v3-10. DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that
runs both the IPv4 protocol (with IP Multicast support) and the IGMP protocol. The DVMRP
metric is a hop count of 32.
IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a multicast group. You must have IGMP
enabled when you enable DVMRP; otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 86 on page 176.

27.2 How DVMRP Works
DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting (RPM) algorithm to generate an IP Multicast
delivery tree. Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches. DVMRP
dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Multicast Protocol
(IGMP). The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups.
1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast (“B” in the following figure).
2 DVMRP-enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong
to this multicast group send back a prune message (“P”).
3 If hosts later join the multicast group, a graft message (“G”) to undo the prune is sent to
the parent.
4 The final multicast (“M”) after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure.

Chapter 27 DVMRP

174

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 84 How DVMRP Works

27.2.1 DVMRP Terminology
DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network.
DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information. These packets are
used to build the DVMRP multicast routing table that is used to build source trees and also
perform Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) checks on incoming multicast packets. RPF checks
prevent duplicate packets being filtered when loops exist in the network topology.
DVMRP prunes trim the multicast delivery tree(s). DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto
the multicast delivery tree.

27.3 Configuring DVMRP
Configure DVMRP on the switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router (“mrouter”).
Click IP Application, DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 85 DVMRP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

175

Chapter 27 DVMRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 63 DVMRP
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select Active to enable DVMRP on the switch. You should do this if you want the switch to
act as a multicast router.

Threshold

Threshold is the maximum time to live (TTL) value. TTL is used to limit the scope of
multicasting. You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many
hops away with multicast traffic. This applies only to multicast traffic this switch sends out.

Index

Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network. The
maximum number of DVMRP configurations allowed is the maximum number of IP routing
domains allowed on the switch. See Section 7.7 on page 79 for more information on IP
routing domains.

Network

This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup.

VID

DVMRP cannot be enabled on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains,
that is, you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations (see Figure 88
on page 177).

Active

Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain.

Apply

Click Apply to save these changes to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.

27.3.1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages
You must have IGMP/RIP enabled when you enable DVMRP; otherwise you see the screen as
in the next figure.
Figure 86 DVMRP: IGMP/RIP Not Set Error

When you disable IGMP, but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen.
Figure 87 DVMRP: Unable to Disable IGMP Error

Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group; otherwise
you see the following screen.

Chapter 27 DVMRP

176

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 88 DVMRP: Duplicate VID Error Message

27.4 Default DVMRP Timer Values
The following are some default DVMRP timer values. These may be changed using line
commands. Please see the commands chapter later in this User's Guide.
Table 64 DVMRP: Default Timer Values

177

DVMRP FIELD

DEFAULT VALUE

Probe interval

10 sec

Report interval

35 sec

Route expiration time

140 sec

Prune lifetime

Variable (less than two hours)

Prune retransmission time

3 sec with exponential back off

Graft retransmission time

5 sec with exponential back off

Chapter 27 DVMRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 28
IP Multicast
This chapter shows you how to configure the IP Multicast screen.

28.1 Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (one sender to one
recipient) or Broadcast (one sender to everybody on the network). IP Multicast is a third way
to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody.
You can configure the switch to untag (remove the VLAN tags from) IP multicast packets that
the switch forwards. This allows the switch to send packets to Ethernet devices that are not
VLAN-aware.

28.2 Configuring
Click IP Application and IP Multicast in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 89 IP Multicast

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 28 IP Multicast

178

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 65 IP Multicast

179

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Port

This read-only field displays the port number.

IP
Multicast
Egress
Untag
Vlan ID

The switch removes the VLAN tag from IP multicast packets belonging to the specified
VLAN before transmission on this port.
Enter a VLAN group ID in this field. Enter 0 to set the switch not to remove any VLAN tags
from the packets.

Apply

Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.

Chapter 28 IP Multicast

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 29
Differentiated Services
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the switch.

29.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in
the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different
priorities to different packet types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific perhop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application
types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the
level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to
handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths
or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request
a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.

29.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS)
field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which
can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that nonDiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
Figure 90 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP (6 bits)

DS (2 bits)

The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each
packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic
can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated
according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.

29.1.2 DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a simple DiffServ network consisting of a group of contiguous
DiffServ-compliant network devices.

Chapter 29 Differentiated Services

180

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 91 DiffServ Network Example

Switch A marks traffic flowing into the network based on the configured marking rules.
Intermediary network devices 1 and 2 allocate network resources (such as bandwidth) by
mapping the DSCP values and the associated policies.

29.2 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to allow the switch to enable DiffServ and apply marking rules and
IEEE802.1p priority mapping on the selected port(s).
Click IP Application, DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 92 DiffServ

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 DiffServ

181

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this option to enable DiffServ on the switch.

Port

This field displays the index number of a port on the switch.

Active

Select this option to enable DiffServ on the port.

Chapter 29 Differentiated Services

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 66 DiffServ (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again.

29.3 DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p Priority Mapping
You can configure the DSCP to IEEE802.1p mapping to allow the switch to prioritize all
traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE802.1p mapping
table.
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1P mapping.
Table 67 Default DSCP-IEEE802.1p Mapping
DSCP VALUE 0 – 7
IEEE802.1P

0

8 – 15

16 – 23

24 – 31

32 – 39

40 – 47

48 – 55

56 – 63

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

29.3.1 Configuring DSCP Settings
To change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ
screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 93 DiffServ: DSCP Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 29 Differentiated Services

182

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 68 DiffServ: DSCP Setting

183

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

0 … 63

This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IEEE802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again.

Chapter 29 Differentiated Services

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 30
DHCP
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.

30.1 Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual
computers to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the
switch as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the switch provides the
TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you disable the DHCP service, you must have another
DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

30.1.1 DHCP modes
The switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
• If you configure the switch as a DHCP server, it will maintain the pool of addresses and
distribute them to your LAN computers.
• If there is an Ethernet device that performs the DHCP server function for your network,
then you can configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent. When the switch receives a
request from a computer on your network, it contacts the Ethernet device (the DHCP
server) for the necessary IP information, and then relays the assigned information back to
the computer.

30.2 DHCP Server Status
Click IP Application, DHCP in the navigation panel. The DHCP Server Status screen
displays.

Chapter 30 DHCP

184

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 94 DHCP: DHCP Server Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 DHCP: DHCP Server Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This is the index number.

VID

This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings
apply.

Server Status

This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address.

Client Pool Size

This field displays the size of the DHCP client IP address pool.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may
change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking
Set Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to end status polling.

30.3 Configuring DHCP Server
Click IP Application, DHCP in the navigation panel. Click the Server link In the DHCP
Server Status screen that displays.

185

Chapter 30 DHCP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 95 DHCP: Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 DHCP: Server
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

VID

Enter the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply.

Client IP Pool
Starting
Address

Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

Size of Client IP Specify the size, or count of the IP address pool.
Pool
IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DHCP server.
Default
Gateway

Enter the IP address of the default gateway device.

Primary/
Secondary
DNS Server

Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the
DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.

Add

Click Add to insert the settings as a new entry in the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configurations.

Clear

Click Clear to reset the fields back to the factory defaults.

VID

This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings
apply.

Type

This field displays Server for the DHCP mode.

DHCP Status

This field displays the starting and the size of DHCP client IP address.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

Chapter 30 DHCP

186

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

30.3.1 DHCP Server Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the switch is used to assign network
information to the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales network.
Figure 96 DHCP Server Network Example

In the DHCP Server screen, configure two DHCP client IP address pools for the two
networks. The following shows an example.
Figure 97 DHCP Server Configuration Example

30.4 DHCP Relay
Configure DHCP relay on the switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the
same subnet. During the initial IP address leasing, the switch helps to relay network
information (such as the IP address and subnet mask) between a DHCP client and a DHCP
server. Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network, network
information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help
of the switch.

187

Chapter 30 DHCP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

30.4.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information
The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server. This
helps provide authentication about the source of the requests. You can also specify additional
information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server.
Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82
field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP
server. The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends
to the DHCP server:
•
•
•
•

Slot ID (1 byte)
Port ID (1 byte)
VLAN ID (2 bytes)
System name (up to 32 bytes, this is optional)

30.4.2 Configuring DHCP Relay
Configure DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen. Click IP Application, DHCP in the
navigation panel and click the Relay link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 98 DHCP: Relay

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 DHCP: Relay
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this check box to enable DHCP relay.

Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Server 1 .. 3
Relay Agent
Information

Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information (slot number, port
number and VLAN ID) to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.

Information

This read-only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup
screen.
Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to the client DHCP
requests that it relays to a DHCP server.

Chapter 30 DHCP

188

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 71 DHCP: Relay (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again.

30.4.3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the switch is used to relay DHCP requests
for the RD and Sales network. There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients
in both networks.
Figure 99 DHCP Relay Network Example

Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown. Make sure you select the Option 82 check box
to set the switch to send additional information (such as the VLAN ID) together with the
DHCP requests to the DHCP server. This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP
address according to the VLAN ID.
Figure 100 DHCP Relay Configuration Example

189

Chapter 30 DHCP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 31
VRRP
This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy
Protocol (VRRP) on the switch.

31.1 Overview
Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway
(this switch). The default gateway can become a single point of failure. Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), defined in RFC 2338, allows you to create redundant backup
gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available.
In VRRP, a virtual router (VR) represents a number of physical layer-3 devices. An IP address
is associated with the virtual router. A layer-3 device having the same IP address is the
preferred master router while the other Layer-3 devices are the backup routers. The master
router forwards traffic for the virtual router. When the master router becomes unavailable, a
backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and
takes over.
The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches (A and B)
implementing one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink
gateway G. Host X is configured to use VR1 (192.168.1.20) as the default gateway. If switch
A has a higher priority, it is the master router. Switch B, having a lower priority, is the backup
router.
Figure 101 VRRP: Example 1

172.21.1.1

172.21.1.100

172.21.1.10

If switch A (the master router) is unavailable, switch B takes over. Traffic is then processed by
switch B.

Chapter 31 VRRP

190

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

31.2 Viewing VRRP Status
Click IP Application, VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as
shown next.
Figure 102 VRRP Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 VRRP Status

191

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number of a rule.

Active

This field displays whether a rule is enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

Network

This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain
that is associated to a virtual router.

VRID

This field displays the ID number of the virtual router.

VR Status

This field displays the status of the virtual router.
This field is Master indicating that this switch functions as the master router.
This field is Backup indicating that this switch functions as a backup router.
This field displays Init when this switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the
Uplink Status field displays Dead.

Uplink Status

This field displays the status of the link between this switch and the uplink gateway.
This field is Alive indicating that the link between this switch and the uplink gateway is
up. Otherwise, this field is Dead.
This field displays Probe when this switch is check for the link state.

Poll Interval(s)

The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change
the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.

Stop

Click Stop to halt system statistic polling.

Chapter 31 VRRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

31.3 Configuring VRRP
Follow the instructions in the follow sections to configure VRRP on the switch.

31.3.1 IP Interface Setup
Before configuring VRRP, first create an IP interface (or routing domain) in the IP Setup
screen (see the Section 7.7 on page 79 for more information).
Click IP Application, VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP
Configuration screen as shown next.
Note: You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs.
Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table
indicated.
Figure 103 VRRP Configuration: IP Interface

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Chapter 31 VRRP

192

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 73 VRRP Configuration: IP Interface
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number of an entry.

Network

This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain.

Authentication Select None to disable authentication. This is the default setting.
Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on
this interface.
Key

When you select Simple in the Authentication field, enter a password key (up to eight
printable ASCII character long) in this field.

Apply

Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table.

31.3.2 VRRP Parameters
This section describes the VRRP parameters.

31.3.2.1 Advertisement Interval
The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still
up and running. The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement
interval. By default, a Hello message is sent out every second.
If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval
expires, it is assumed that the master router is down. Then the backup router with the highest
priority becomes the master router.
Note: All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement
interval.

31.3.2.2 Priority
Configure the priority level (1 to 254) to set which backup router to take over in case the
master router goes down. The backup router with the highest priority will take over. The
priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address(es) associated with the virtual router is
255.

31.3.2.3 Preempt Mode
If the master router is unavailable, a backup router assumes the role of the master router.
However, when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network, it will preempt
the lower priority backup router that is the master. Disable preempt mode to prevent this from
happening.
By default, a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the
master router regardless of the preempt mode.
193

Chapter 31 VRRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

31.3.3 Configuring VRRP Parameters
After you set up an IP interface, configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration
screen.
Figure 104 VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Active

Select this option to enable this VRRP entry.

Name

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.

Network

Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies.

Virtual Router ID

Select a virtual router number (1 to 7) for which this VRRP entry is created.
You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network.

Advertisement Interval Specify the number of seconds between Hello message transmissions. The
default is 1.
Preempt Mode

Select this option to activate preempt mode.

Priority

Enter a number (between 1 and 254) to set the priority level. The bigger the
number, the higher the priority.
This field is 100 by default.

Uplink Gateway

Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation.
The switch checks the link to the uplink gateway.

Primary Virtual IP

Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation.

Secondary Virtual IP

This field is optional. Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in
dotted decimal notation. This field is ignored when you enter 0.0.0.0.

Add

Click Add to apply the changes.

Cancel

Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table.

Clear

Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.

Chapter 31 VRRP

194

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

31.4 VRRP Configuration Summary
To view a summary of all VRRP configurations on the switch, scroll down to the bottom of the
VRRP Configuration screen.
Figure 105 VRRP Configuration: Summary

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 VRRP Configuring: VRRP Parameters
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number of an entry.

Active

This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

Name

This field displays a descriptive name of an entry.

Network

This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface.

VRID

This field displays the ID number of a virtual router.

Primary VIP

This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router.

Uplink Gateway This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway.
Priority

This field displays the priority level (1 to 255) of the entry.

Delete

Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.

Cancel

Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.

31.5 VRRP Configuration Examples
The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the switch.

31.5.1 One Subnet Network Example
The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 (VRID =1)
and two switches. The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G
(172.21.1.100). The host computer X is set to use VR1 as the default gateway.

195

Chapter 31 VRRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 106 VRRP Configuration Example: One Virtual Router Network

172.21.1.1

172.21.1.100

172.21.1.10

You want to set switch A as the master router. Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP
Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below.
Figure 107 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A

Figure 108 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B

After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration, the VRRP Status screens for both
switches are shown next.

Chapter 31 VRRP

196

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 109 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Status on Switch A

Figure 110 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Status on Switch B

31.5.2 Two Subnets Example
The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic.
Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways. Each switch is configured to
backup a virtual router using VRRP.
You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for
virtual router VR2. On the other hand, switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1.
Figure 111 VRRP Configuration Example: Two Virtual Router Network

172.21.1.1

172.21.1.100

172.21.1.10

Keeping the VRRP configuration in example 1 for virtual router VR1 (refer to Section 31.5.2
on page 197), you need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2
on each switch. Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures
below.

197

Chapter 31 VRRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 112 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A

Figure 113 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B

After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration, the VRRP Status screens for both
switches are shown next.
Figure 114 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch A

Figure 115 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch B

Chapter 31 VRRP

198

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

199

Chapter 31 VRRP

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 32
Maintenance
This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the
firmware and configuration files.

32.1 The Maintenance Screen
Click Management, Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 116

Maintenance

32.2 Firmware Upgrade
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to
your computer before uploading to the device.
Note: Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model
firmware may damage your device.
From the Maintenance screen, display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next.
Figure 117

Firmware Upgrade

Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File
Path text box or click Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Upgrade.

Chapter 32 Maintenance

200

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your
current firmware version number.

32.3 Restore a Configuration File
Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore
Configuration screen.
Figure 118 Restore Configuration

Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text
box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen (below) from which you can locate it.
After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the name of the configuration file
on the switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore
using this screen.

32.4 Backing Up a Configuration File
Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various “snap shots” of your
device from which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration
screen.
Figure 119 Backup Configuration

Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this
screen.
1 Click Backup.
2 Click Save to display the Save As screen.

201

Chapter 32 Maintenance

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop-down list box
and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save the
configuration file to your computer.

32.5 Load Factory Defaults
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Defaults
to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory
defaults. The following message appears.
Figure 120 Load Factory Default: Conformation

2 Click OK to display the screen shown next.
Figure 121 Load Factory Default: Start

3 Click OK to begin resetting all switch configurations to the factory defaults and then wait
for the switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. If you want to access the switch
web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in
the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address (192.168.1.1).

32.6 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off.
Follow the steps below to reboot the switch.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Reboot System to
display the next screen.
Figure 122 Reboot System: Confirmation

2 Click OK to display the screen shown next.

Chapter 32 Maintenance

202

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 123 Reboot System: Start

3 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This
does not affect the switch’s configuration.

32.7 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using
FTP commands. First, understand the filename conventions.

32.7.1 Filename Conventions
The configuration file contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password,
switch setup, IP Setup, etc.. Once you have customized the switch's settings, they can be saved
back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the
system firmware and has a “bin” filename extension.
Table 76 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE

INTERNAL
NAME

Configuration File

config

Firmware

Ras

EXTERNAL
DESCRIPTION
NAME
This is the configuration filename on the switch.
Uploading the config file replaces the specified
configuration file system, including your switch
configurations, system-related data (including the
default password), the error log and the trace log.
*.bin

This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on
the switch.

32.7.1.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras

This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the
switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg

This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on
your computer.

203

Chapter 32 Maintenance

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the
source, you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be
sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.
Note: Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model
firmware may damage your device.

32.7.2 FTP Command Line Procedure
1 Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2 Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your switch.
3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4 Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch, for example, put
firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the
switch and renames it to “ras”. Similarly, put config.cfg config transfers the
configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to the switch and renames it to “config”.
Likewise get config config.cfg transfers the configuration file on the switch to
your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See Table 76 on page 203 for more
information on filename conventions.
7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.

32.7.3 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP
clients.
General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Host Address

Enter the address of the host server.

Login Type

Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server
for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service
administrator has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.

Transfer Type

Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.
Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.

Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Local Directory

Chapter 32 Maintenance

Specify the default local directory (path).

204

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

32.7.4 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Secured Client Set in the Remote Management screen does
not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the switch will disconnect the Telnet
session immediately.

205

Chapter 32 Maintenance

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 33
Access Control
This chapter describes how to control access to the switch.

33.1 Overview
• A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist.
The console port has higher priority. If you telnet to the switch and someone is already
logged in from the console port, then you will see the following message.
Figure 124 Console Port Priority
“Local administrator is configuring this device now!!!
Connection to host lost.”

• A console port, SSH or Telnet session can coexist with one FTP session, up to five Web
sessions (five different usernames and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control
sessions.
Table 77 Access Control Overview
Console Port

SSH

Telnet

FTP

The console port, SSH and Telnet share One session
one session. The Console port has the
highest priority and Telnet has the lowest
priority.

Web

SNMP

Up to five accounts

No limit

33.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Click Management, Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as
shown.

Chapter 33 Access Control

206

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 125 Access Control

33.3 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to
manage and monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management
information between the network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A
manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version
one (SNMPv1) and/or SNMP version 2c. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management
operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 126 SNMP Management Model

An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch (this switch). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators
perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor
managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a switch. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection
of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of
accessing these objects.

207

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol
operations:
Table 78 SNMP Commands
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Get

Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.

GetNext

Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an
agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an
agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.

Set

Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.

Trap

Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.

33.3.1 Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The switch supports the following MIBs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
RFC 1157 SNMP v1
RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
RFC 1155 SMI
RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
RFC 1757 RMON
RFC 1253 OSPF MIBs
SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP,
RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP

33.3.2 SNMP Traps
The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. SNMP traps supported are
outlined in the following table.
Table 79 SNMP Traps
OBJECT LABEL

OBJECT ID

DESCRIPTION

SNMPv2 Traps
Cold Start

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the switch is turned on.

WarmStart

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the switch restarts.

linkDown

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.

linkUp

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.

Chapter 33 Access Control

208

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 79 SNMP Traps (continued)
OBJECT LABEL

OBJECT ID

DESCRIPTION

authenticationFailure

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from
non-authenticated hosts.

RFC 1493 Traps
newRoot

1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes.

topology change

1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.

33.3.3 Configuring SNMP
From the Access Control screen, display the SNMP screen. You can click Access Control to
go back to the Access Control screen.
Figure 127 Access Control: SNMP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Access Control: SNMP
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Get Community

Enter the get community, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNextrequests from the management station.

Set Community

Enter the set community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the
management station.

Trap Community

Enter the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager.

Trap Destination

Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

33.3.4 Setting Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the switch via
web configurator at any one time.

209

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes. The
username for the Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is
1234.
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password
(1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can
view but not configure switch settings.
Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen.
Figure 128 Access Control: Logins

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 Access Control: Logins
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default
administrator user name. Only the administrator has read/write access.
Old Password

Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when
shipped).

New Password

Enter your new system password.

Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These people have read-only access.
User Name

Set a user name (up to 30 characters long).

Password

Enter your new system password.

Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 33 Access Control

210

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

33.4 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure
communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure
encrypted communication
between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 129 SSH Communication Example

33.5 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote
hosts.
Figure 130 How SSH Works

1 Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself
with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key
and server key and sends the result back to the server.

211

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections,
the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2 Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of
encryption method to use.
3 Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is
established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication
information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server.

33.6 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods
(DES, 3DES and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote
management and file transfer on port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.

33.6.1 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating
system) that is used to connect to the switch over SSH.

33.7 Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web
protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an applicationlevel protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an
unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the
other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web
configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the switch) must always
authenticate itself to the SSL client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with
the switch), whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server
requires it to do so. Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSLclient must send the switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from
a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default)
on the switch’s WS (web server).

Chapter 33 Access Control

212

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the switch’s
WS (web server).
Figure 131 HTTPS Implementation

Note: If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the switch
blocks all HTTP connection attempts.

33.8 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch, then in your browser enter
“https://switch IP Address/” as the web site address where “switch IP Address” is the IP
address or domain name of the switch you wish to access.

33.8.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking
if you trust the server certificate. Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the
certificate is from the switch.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the
web configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.

213

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 132 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer)

33.8.2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Website Certified by an Unknown
Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate. Click Examine Certificate
if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch.
If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected, then click OK to continue
in Netscape.
Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch’s certificate into the SSL
client.
Figure 133 Security Certificate 1 (Netscape)

Chapter 33 Access Control

214

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 134 Security Certificate 2 (Netscape)

33.8.3 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the switch main
screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a
secure connection.

215

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 135 Login Screen (Internet Explorer)

Figure 136 Login Screen (Netscape)

Chapter 33 Access Control

216

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

33.9 Service Port Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch.
You may also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each
service in the Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go
back to the main Access Control screen.
Figure 137 Access Control: Service Access Control

The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 Access Control: Service Access Control
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Services

Services you may use to access the switch are listed here.

Active

Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the
switch.

Service Port

For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service
port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field. If you change the default
port number then you will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new
port number for that service.

Timeout

Type how many minutes (between 1 and 255) a management session (via the web
configurator) can be left idle before the session times out. After it times out you have to
log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

33.10 Remote Management
From the Access Control screen, display the Remote Management screen as shown next.
You can specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may
use a service to manage the switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control
screen.

217

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 138 Access Control: Remote Management

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 83 Access Control: Remote Management
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Entry

This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted
computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch.

Active

Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you
wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it.

Start Address
End Address

Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this
switch.
The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or
protocol matches the range set here. The switch immediately disconnects the session
if it does not match.

Telnet/FTP/
Web/ICMP/
SNMP

Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted
computers.

Apply

Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 33 Access Control

218

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

219

Chapter 33 Access Control

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 34
Diagnostic
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen.

34.1 Diagnostic
Click Management, Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to
check system logs, reset the system or ping IP addresses.
Figure 139 Diagnostic

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 Diagnostic
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

System Log

Click Display to display a log of events in the multi-line text box.
Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry.

IP Ping

Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address (in the field to the left).

Ethernet Port Test

From the Port drop-down list box, select a port number and click Port Test to
perform internal loopback test.

Chapter 34 Diagnostic

220

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

221

Chapter 34 Diagnostic

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 35
Cluster Management
This chapter introduces cluster management.

35.1 Overview
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch, called the cluster
manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be
able to communicate with one another.
Table 85 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members 24
Cluster Member Models

Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management
implementation.

Cluster Manager

The switch through which you manage the cluster member
switches.

Cluster Members

The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.

In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other
switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Figure 140 Clustering Application Example

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

222

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

35.2 Cluster Management Status
Click Management, Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following
screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 141 Cluster Management: Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 86 Cluster Management: Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Status

This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly
and not via the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)

Manager

This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.

The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following
Member
fields describe the cluster member switches.

223

Index

You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each
number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web
configurator (see Figure 142 on page 224).

HwAddr

This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.

Name

This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.

Model

This field displays the model name.

Status

This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch
was set as the manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after
the link between cluster member and manager goes down)

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

35.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then
select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web
configurator home page. This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page
that you'd see if you accessed it directly are different.
Figure 142 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen

35.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager
switch as shown in the following example.

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

224

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 143 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:47:52 1970
User (192.168.1.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w1 owner
group
3209434 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw1 owner
group
393216 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w1 owner
group
0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf
-rw-rw-rw1 owner
group
0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf
226 File sent OK
ftp: 463 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 463000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK
ftp> put 350du1.bin fw-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf
226 File received OK
ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>

The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
Table 87 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

User

Enter “admin”.

Password

The web configurator password default is 1234.

ls

Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch’s
firmware and configuration file.

350du1.bin

This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the
cluster member switch.

fw-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf

This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the
cluster manager switch.

config-00-a0-c5-d4-88-bf This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen
in the cluster manager switch.

35.3 Configuring Cluster Management
Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen.

225

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 144 Clustering Management Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Clustering Manager
Active

Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster
can only have one manager. Other (directly connected) switches that are set to
be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a
switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster
manager, then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management
Status screen and a warning icon (
) appears in the member summary list
below.

Name

Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 20
printable characters (no spaces are allowed).

VID

This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN.
All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong
to the same cluster. Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not
visible in the Clustering Candidates list. This field is ignored if the Clustering
Manager is using Port-based VLAN.

Apply

Click Apply to save these changes to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.

Clustering
Candidate
List

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The
switches must be directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to
be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in
the Clustering Candidate list.

226

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration (continued)
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Password

Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a
member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator
password. If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password
afterwards, then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is
displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning
icon (
) appears in the member summary list below.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those
switches to select them. Then enter their common web configurator password.

Add

Click Add to save this part of the screen to the switch.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.

Refresh

Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.

The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.

227

Index

This is the index number of a cluster member switch.

HwAddr

This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.

Name

This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.

Model

This is the cluster member switch’s model name.

Remove

Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster
member switch from the cluster.

Cancel

Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.

Chapter 35 Cluster Management

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 36
MAC Table
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.

36.1 Overview
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how
frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address,
belonging to what VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC
address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC
Forwarding screen).
The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC
address came.
2 The switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC
address already learned in the MAC table.
•
•

•

If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then
it forwards the frame to that port.
If the switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address,
then the frame is flooded to all ports. Too much port flooding leads to
network congestion.
If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but
the destination port is the same as the port it came in on, then it filters
the frame.

Figure 145 MAC Table Flowchart

Chapter 36 MAC Table

228

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

36.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Click Management, MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 146 MAC Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 89 MAC Table

229

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Sort by

Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that
button type. The information is then displayed in the summary table below.

MAC

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.

VID

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.

Port

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number.

Index

This is the incoming frame index number.

MAC Address

This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.

VID

This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.

Port

This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned.

Type

This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).

Chapter 36 MAC Table

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 37
IP Table
This chapter introduces the IP table.

37.1 Overview
The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the switch’s ports. It
shows what device IP address, belonging to what VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which
port(s) and whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static (belonging to
the switch).
The switch uses the IP table to determine how to forward packets. See the following figure.
1 The switch examines a received packet and learns the port on which this source IP
address came.
2 The switch checks to see if the packet's destination IP address matches a source IP
address already learned in the IP table.
•
•

•

If the switch has already learned the port for this IP address, then it
forwards the packet to that port.
If the switch has not already learned the port for this IP address, then
the packet is flooded to all ports. Too much port flooding leads to
network congestion.
If the switch has already learned the port for this IP address, but the
destination port is the same as the port it came in on, then it filters the
packet.

Figure 147 IP Table Flowchart

Chapter 37 IP Table

230

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

37.2 Viewing the IP Table
Click Management, IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 148 IP Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 90 IP Table

231

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Sort by

Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button
type. The information is then displayed in the summary table below.

IP

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address.

VID

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.

Port

Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number.

Index

This field displays the index number.

IP Address

This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came.

VID

This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs.

Port

This is the port from which the above IP address was learned. This field displays CPU to
indicate the IP address belongs to the switch.

Type

This shows whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(belonging to the switch).

Chapter 37 IP Table

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 38
ARP Table
This chapter introduces ARP Table.

38.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC
address, on the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits
long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its
corresponding IP address.

38.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the
switch, the switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it
to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the
LAN. The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the
known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the switch puts all
ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The
replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that
knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the
sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP
updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that
replied.

38.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Click Management, ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use the
ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).

Chapter 38 ARP Table

232

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 149 ARP Table

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 91 ARP Table

233

LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This is the ARP Table entry number.

IP Address

This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with
corresponding MAC address below.

MAC Address

This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above.

Type

This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).

Chapter 38 ARP Table

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 39
Routing Table
This chapter introduces the routing table.

39.1 Overview
The routing table contains the route information to the network(s) that the switch can reach.
The switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from
other Ethernet devices.

39.2 Viewing the Routing Table
Click Management, Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 150 Routing Table Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 92 Routing Table Status
LABEL

DESCRIPTION

Index

This field displays the index number.

Destination

This field displays the destination IP routing domain.

Gateway

This field displays the IP address of the gateway device.

Metric

This field displays the cost of the route.

Type

This field displays the method used to learn the route.

Chapter 39 Routing Table

234

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

235

Chapter 39 Routing Table

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 40
Introducing the Commands
This chapter introduces the commands and gives a summary of commands available.

40.1 Overview
In addition to the web configurator, you can use line commands to configure the switch. Use
line commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting. If you have problems with
your switch, customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist
them in troubleshooting.
Note: See the web configurator parts of this User’s Guide for background information
on features configurable by the web configurator.

40.1.1 Switch Configuration File
When you configure the switch using either the CLI (Command Line Interface) or web
configurator, the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the
switch. You can perform the following with a configuration file:
• Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in your network.
• Restore switch configuration.
• Use the same configuration file to set all switches (of the same model) in your network to
the same settings.
Note: You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor.
Make sure you use valid commands. The switch rejects configuration files with
invalid or incomplete commands.

40.2 Accessing the CLI
You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the CLI on the switch.
Note: The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five
minutes of inactivity. If this happens to you, simply log back in again.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

236

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

40.2.1 Access Priority
• You can only access the CLI with the administrator account (the default username is
admin and password is 1234).
• By default, only one CLI management session is allowed via either the console port or
Telnet. Console port access has higher priority.
• Use the configure multi-login command in the configuration mode to allow
multiple concurrent logins. However, no more than five concurrent login sessions are
allowed.

40.2.2 The Console Port
Connect to the switch’s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the
following settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•

VT100 terminal emulation
9600 bps
No parity
8 data bits
1 stop bit
No flow control

40.2.2.1 Initial Screen
When you turn on your switch, it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization.
You can view the initialization information using the console port. After the initialization, the
login screen displays (refer to Section 40.3 on page 238).
Figure 151 Initial Console Port Screen
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
initialize mgmt, ethernet address: 00:a0:c5:fe:ea:70
initialize switch, ethernet address: 00:a0:c5:fe:ea:71
Initializing switch unit 0...
Initializing switch unit 1...
Press ENTER to continue...

40.2.3 Telnet
Use the following steps to telnet into your switch.
1 For local management, connect your computer to the RJ-45 management port (labeled
MGMT) on the switch.
2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet. In
Windows, click Start (usually in the bottom left corner), Run and then type telnet
192.168.1.1 (the default management IP address) and click OK.

237

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

3 A login screen displays (refer to Section 40.3 on page 238).

40.3 The Login Screen
After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console
connection or Telnet, a login screen displays as shown below. For your first login, enter the
default administrator login username “admin” and password “1234”.
Figure 152 CLI: Login Screen
Enter User Name : admin
Enter Password : XXXX

40.4 Command Syntax Conventions
The rules of the commands are listed next.
• The command keywords are in courier new font.
• The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets <>, for instance, ping
 means that you must specify an IP number for this command.
• The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets [], for instance,
configure snmp-server [contact ] [location
]

•
•
•
•
•

•
•

means that the contact and location fields are optional.
“Command” refers to a command used in the command line interface (CI command).
The | symbol means “or”.
The entry  in the command lines refers to carriage return. Press [ENTER] or carriage
return after a command to execute the command.
Use the up (y) or down (z) arrow key to scroll through the command history list.
The CLI does not accept partial or incomplete commands. You may enter a unique part of
a command and press [TAB] to have the switch automatically display the full command.
For example, if you enter “config” and press [TAB], the full command of “configure”
automatically displays.
Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the switch. Commands configured after the
interface command correspond to those ports.
Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma. Ranges of port numbers are
typed separated by a dash.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

238

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

40.5 Getting Help
The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the
commands:
• List of available commands under a command group.
• Detailed descriptions of the commands.

40.5.1 List of Available Commands
Enter “help” to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands.
Enter “?” to display a list of commands you can use.
Figure 153 CLI Help: List of Commands: Example 1
ras> help
Commands available:
help
logout
exit
history
enable
show ip 
show hardware-monitor 
show system-information
ping  
ping  [..]
ping help
traceroute  
traceroute  [..]
traceroute help
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> 
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> [command ]
ras>

239

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 154 CLI Help: List of Commands: Example 2
ras> ?
enable
exit
help
history
logout
ping
show
ssh
traceroute
ras>

Turn on privileged commands
Exit from the EXEC
Description of the interactive help system
Show a list of previously run commands
Exit from the EXEC
Exec ping
Show system information
SSH client
Exec traceroute

40.5.2 Detailed Command Information
Enter  help to display detailed sub command and parameters.
Enter  ? to display detailed help information about the sub commands and
parameters.
Figure 155 CLI Help: Detailed Command Information: Example 1
ras> ping help
Commands available:
ping 
<
[ in-band|out-of-band|vlan  ]
[ size <0-1472> ]
[ -t ]
>
ras>

Figure 156 CLI: Help: Detailed Command Information: Example 2
ras> ping ?

help

destination ip address
Description of ping help

40.6 Command Modes
There are three CLI command modes: User, Enable and Configure.
When you first log into the CLI, the initial command mode is the User mode. The User mode
commands are a subset of the Enable mode commands. The User mode command prompt ends
with an angle bracket (>).

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

240

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

To enter Enable (or privileged) mode, type enable and enter a password when prompted (the
default is 1234). When you enter the Enable mode, the command prompt changes to the pound
sign (#).
To enter the configuration mode, type configure or config. The Configure mode command
prompt consists of the word “config” and the pound sign (#). There are various sub
configuration modes: interface, router and VLAN.
• To enter config-vlan mode, type vlan followed by a number (between 1 to 4094). For
example, enter vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10.
• To enter config-interface mode and configure the ports, enter interface portchannel followed by a port number. For example, interface port-channel 10.
• To configure the routing domain, enter interface route-domain followed by the
domain IP address and subnet mask bits (for example, interface route-domain
192.168.1.1/24).
• Use the router commands to configure the routing protocol settings.
Enter exit or logout to quit from the current mode or log out from the CLI.

40.7 Using Command History
The switch keeps a list of up to 256 commands you have entered for the current CLI session.
You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up (y) or down (z) arrow key
to scroll through the previously used commands and press [ENTER]. Use the history command
to display the list of commands.
Figure 157 CLI: History Command Example
ras> history
enable
exit
show ip
history
ras>

40.8 Saving Your Configuration
After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands, use the write memory
command to save the changes permanently.
Figure 158 CLI: write memory
ras# write memory

241

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Note: The write memory command is not available in User mode.
You must save your changes after each CLI session. All unsaved configuration
changes are lost once you restart the switch.

40.8.1 Logging Out
In User mode, enter the exit or logout command to log out of the CLI.

40.9 Command Summary
The following sections summarize the commands available in the switch together with a brief
description of each command. Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are
displayed in the CLI. See the related section in the User’s Guide for more background
information.

40.9.1 User Mode
The following table describes the commands available for User mode.
Table 93

Command Summary: User Mode

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

enable

Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode. See Section 40.9.2
on page 243.

exit

Logs out from the CLI.

help

Displays help information.

history

Displays a list of previously command(s) that you have
executed. The switch stores up to 256 commands in
history.

logout

Exits from the CLI.

ping

show

ssh


[]
[size <0-1472>]
[-t]

Sends a Ping request to an Ethernet device.

help

Displays help information for this command.

hardware-monitor 

Displays current hardware monitor information with the
specified temperature unit (Celsius C or Fahrenheit F).

ip

Displays IP related information.

system-information

Displays general system information.

<1|2> <[user@]dest-ip>

Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

242

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 93

Command Summary: User Mode (continued)

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Determines the path a packet takes to a device.
traceroute 
[in-band|out-of-band|vlan
]
[ttl <1-255>]
[wait <1-60>]
[queries <1-10>]
Displays help information for this command.

help

40.9.2 Enable Mode
The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode.
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

baudrate
<1|2|3|4|5
>

Sets the console port baud rate.
1:38400
2:19200
3:9600
4:57600
5:115200

boot

Restarts the system with the specified
configuration file.

config 

Accesses Configuration mode. See
Section 40.9.3 on page 247.

configure
copy

Backs up running configuration to the
specified TFTP server with the specified
file name.

running-config tftp
 
tftp

config 


Restores configuration with the specified
filename from the specified TFTP server.

flash 


Restores firmware via TFTP.

disable

Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.

enable

Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode.

erase

running-config

Resets to the factory default settings.

exit

Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.

help

Displays help information.

history

Displays a list of command(s) that you
have previously executed.

igmp-flush

Removes all IGMP information.

kick



Disconnects the specified TCP session.

logout

Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.

mac-flush

Clears the MAC address table.

243

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND

no

DESCRIPTION



Removes all learned MAC address on the
specified port(s).

logging

Disables syslog logging.
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet
device.

ping

[vlan ][..]

Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device
in the specified VLAN(s).

reload

config 

Restarts the system and use the specified
configuration file.

show

classifier

Displays all classifier related information.

[name]

Displays the specified classifier related
information.
Displays cluster management status.

cluster
candidates

Displays cluster candidate information.

member

Displays the MAC address of the cluster
member(s).

members config

Displays the configuration of the cluster
member(s).

member mac 
dhcp

relay

Displays DHCP relay settings.

server

Displays DHCP server settings.

server  Displays DHCP server settings in a
specified VLAN.

diffserv

Displays general DiffServ settings.

garp

Displays GARP information.

hardware-monitor



Displays the HTTPS information.

https

igmp-filtering

Displays current hardware monitor
information with the specified temperature
unit (Celsius C or Fahrenheit F).

certificate

Displays the HTTPS certificates.

key 

Displays the HTTPS key.

session

Displays current HTTPS session(s).

timeout

Displays the HTTPS session timeout.

profile [name]

Displays IGMP filtering profile settings.

igmp-snooping

Displays global IGMP snooping settings.

interface 

Displays current interface status.

interfaces config


Displays current interface configuration.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

244

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

bandwidthcontrol

Displays bandwidth control settings.

bstorm-control

Displays broadcast storm control settings.

egress

Displays outgoing port information.

igmp-filtering

Displays IGMP filtering settings.

igmp-grouplimited

Displays the IGMP group limit.

igmp-immediateleave

Displays the IGMP Immidiate Leave
setting.
Displays IP related information.

ip

Displays the ARP table.

dvmrp group

Displays DVMRP group information.

dvmrp interface

Displays DVMRP interface information.

dvmrp neighbour

Displays DVMRP neighbour information.

dvmrp prune

Displays the DVMRP prune information.

dvmrp route

Displays the DVMRP routes.

igmp

DIsplays the IGMP setting.

iptable all
[IP|VID|PORT]

Displays the IP address table. You can
sort the table based on the IP address,
VLAN ID or the port number.

iptable static

Displays the statis IP address table.

ospf database

Displays OSPF link state database
information.

ospf interface

Displays OSPF interface settings.

ospf neighbor

Displays OSPF neighbor information.

route

Displays IP routing information.

route static

Displays IP static route information.

tcp

Displays IP TCP information.

udp

Displays IP UDP information.

lacp

Displays LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol) settings.

logging

Displays system logs.

loginPrecedence

Displays login precedence settings.

logins

Displays login account information.

mac

245

arp

address-table


Displays MAC address table.
You can sort by MAC address, VID or
port.

address-table
static

Displays static MAC address table.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

mac-aging-time

Displays MAC learning aging time.

mac-count

Displays the count of MAC addresses
learnt.

multicast

Displays multicast settings.

multi-login

Displays multi-login information

mvr

DIsplays all MVR settings.



Displays the specified MVR group
settings.
Displays all policy related information.

policy
[name]

Displays the specified policy related
information.
Displays all port authentication settings.

port-accessauthenticator
[port-list]

Displays port authentication settings on
the specified port(s).
Displays all port security settings.

port-security
[port-list]

Displays port security settings on the
specified port(s).

radius-server

Displays RADIUS server settings.

remote-management

Displays all secured client information.

router

[index]

Displays the specified secured client
information.

dvmrp

Displays DVMRP settings.

igmp

Displays global IGMP settings.

ospf

Displays OSPF settings.

ospf area

Displays OSPF area settings.

ospf network

Displays OSPF network (or interface)
settings.

ospf
redistribute

Displays OSPF redistribution settings.

ospf virtuallink

Displays OSPF virtual link settings.

rip

Displays global RIP settings.

vrrp

Displays VRRP settings.

running-config

Displays current operating configuration.

service-control

Displays service control settings.

snmp-server

Displays SNMP settings.

spanning-tree
ssh

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

config

Displays Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
settings.
Displays general SSH settings.

246

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 94 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

known-hosts

Displays known SSH hosts information.

key


Displays internal SSH public and private
key information.

session

Displays current SSH session(s).

system-information

Displays general system information.

time

Displays current system time and date.

timesync

Displays time server information.

trunk

Displays link aggregation information.

vlan

Displays the status of all VLANs.



Displays VLAN stacking settings.

vlan-stacking
vlan1q
ssh

gvrp

Displays GVRP settings.

port-isolation

Displays port isolation settings.
Connects to an SSH server with the
specified SSH version.

<1|2> <[user@]destip>
[command ]

Connects to an SSH server with the
specified SSH version and addition
commands to be executed on the server.
Determines the path a packet takes to a
device.

traceroute  [inband|out-ofband|vlan ][ttl <1-255>]
[wait <1-60>]
[queries <1-10>]

write

Displays the status of the specified VLAN.

help

Displays help information for this
command.

memory

Saves current configuration to the
configuration file the switch is currently
using.



Saves current configuration to the
specified configuration file on the switch.

40.9.3 General Configuration Mode
The following table lists the commands in Configuration (or Config) mode.
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode
COMMAND

admin-password
bandwidthcontrol

247

DESCRIPTION




Changes the administrator
password.
Enables bandwidth control.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

bcptransparency

Enables Bridge Control Protocol
(BCP) transparency.

classifier

cluster

defaultmanagement

 <[packetformat
<802.3untag|802.3tag
| EtherIIuntag|
EtherIItag>]
[priority <0-7>]
[vlan ][ethernet-type
]
[source-mac ] [sourceport ]
[destination-mac
]
[dscp <0-63> ] [ipprotocol 
[establish-only]]
[source-ip  [mask-bits
]]
[source-socket
]
[destination-ip

[mask-bits ]]
[destination-socket
]
[inactive]>

Configures a classifier. A
classifier groups traffic into data
flows according to specific
criteria such as the source
address, destination address,
source port number, destination
port number or incoming port
number.

help

Displays help information for
this command.



Enables clustering in the
specified VLAN group.

member 
password 

Sets the cluster memeber.

name 

Sets a descriptive name for the
cluster.

rcommand 

Logs into the CLI of the
specified cluster member.



Specifies through which traffic
flow the switch is to send
packets.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

248

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

dhcp

DESCRIPTION
Enables DHCP relay.

relay

Sets the IP addresses of up to 3
helper-address
DHCP servers.
 


server 

Allows the switch to add system
name to agent information.

option

Allows the switch to add DHCP
relay agent information.

starting-address



Enables DiffServ.

diffserv
dscp <0-63> priority
<0-7>

Sets the DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1q
mappings.
Exits from the CLI.

exit
garp

information

join <100-65535>
leave 
leaveall 

Configures GARP time settings.

help

Displays help information.

history

Displays a list of previous
command(s) that you have
executed.

hostname



Sets the switch’s name for
identification purposes.

https

cert-regeneration


Re-generates a certificate.

timeout <0-65535>

Sets the HTTPS timeout period.
Enables IGMP filtering on the
switch.

igmp-filtering
profile 
start-address 
end-address 

Enables IGMP snooping.

igmp-snooping

interface

249

Sets the range of multicast
address(es) in a profile.

unknown-multicastframe


Sets how to treat traffic from
unknown multicast group.

port-channel 

Enables a port or a list of ports
for configuration. See Section
40.9.4 on page 261 for more
details.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION
Enables a routing domain for
configuration. See Section
40.9.5 on page 264 for more
details.

route-domain /
ip

 

Sets the IP address and subnet
mask of the out-of-band
management port.

default-gateway


Sets the default gateway’s IP
address for the out-of-band
management port.

name-server



Sets the IP address of a domain
name server.

route

 


Creates a static route.

address

Sets the metric of a static route
 
or deactivates a static route.

[metric ]
[name ]
[inactive]
Enables Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP).

lacp
system-priority

<1-65535>

Sets the priority of an active port
using LACP.

loginPrecedence 

Select which database the
switch should use (first) to
authenticate a user.

logins

Configures up to four read-only
login accounts.

username 
password 

Exits from the CLI.

logout
mac-aging-time

<10-3000>

Sets learned MAC aging time.

mac-filter

name  mac
 vlan
 drop 

Configures a static MAC
address port filtering rule.

inactive
mac-forward

Configures a static MAC
address forwarding rule.

name  mac
 vlan
 interface

inactive

Disables a static MAC address
forwarding rule.
Enables port mirroring.

mirror-port

mode

Disables a static MAC address
port filtering rule.



Enables port mirroring on a
specified port.

zynos

Changes the CLI mode to the
ZyNOS format.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

250

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

multi-login

Enables multi-login.

mvr



Enters the MVR (Multicast
VLAN Registration)
configuration mode.
Refer to Section 40.10 on page
266 for more information.

no

bandwidth-control

Disable bandwidth control on
the switch.

bcp-transparency
classifier



Disables the classifier. Each
classifier has one rule.
If you disable a classifier you
cannot use policy rule related
information.

 inactive

Enables a classifier.
Disables cluster management
on the switch.

cluster
member 

Disables DHCP relay.

dhcp relay
information

Disables the relay agent
information option 82.

option

System name is not appended
to option 82 information field.
Disables DHCP server settings.

dhcp server 
default-gateway

Disables DHCP server default
gateway settings.

primary-dns

Disables DHCP primary DNS
server settings.

secondary-dns

Disables DHCP server
secondary DNS settings.
Disables the DiffServ settings.

diffserv
https

Resets the session timeout to
the default of 300 seconds.

timeout

Disables IGMP filtering on the
switch.

igmp-filtering

251

Removes the cluster member.

profile 

Disables the specified IGMP
filtering profile.

profile 
start-address
 end-address


Clears the settings of the
specified IGMP filtering profile.

igmp-snooping

Disables IGMP snooping.

ip

Sets the management IP
address to the default value.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

route  

Removes a specified IP static
route.

route  
inactive

Enables a specified IP static
route.

lacp

Disables the link aggregation
control protocol (dynamic
trunking) on the switch.

logins

Disables login access to the
specified name.

mac-filter

mac-forward

name  mac
 vlan
 drop

inactive

Enables the specified MAC-filter
rule.

name  mac
 vlan
 drop


Disables the specified MAC
filter rule.

name  mac
 vlan

interface


Removes the specified MAC
forwarding entry, belonging to a
VLAN group (if any) forwarded
through an interface(s).

name  mac
 vlan

interface

inactive

Enables the specified MAC
address, belonging to a VLAN
group (if any) forwarded through
an interface(s).

mirror-port

Disables port mirroring on the
switch.

multi-login

Disables another administrator
from logging into Telnet or the
CLI.

mvr

Displays MVR on the switch.

policy 

Deletes the policy. A policy sets
actions for the classified traffic.

inactive

Disables port authentication on
the switch.

port-accessauthenticator

port-security

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

Enables a policy.



Disables authentication on the
listed ports.


reauthenticate

Disables the re-authentication
mechanism on the listed port(s).
Disables port security on the
device.

252

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION



Disables port security on the
specified ports.

 learn Enables MAC address learning
on the specified ports.
inactive
Disables the use of
authentication from the RADIUS
server.

radius-server
remote-management

router



Clears a secure client set entry
from the list of secure clients.

 service


Disables a secure client set
entry number from using the
selected remote management
service.

dvmrp

Disables DVMRP on the switch.

igmp

Disables IGMP on the switch.

ospf

Disables OSPF on the switch.

rip

Disable RIP on the switch.

vrrp network / vr-id <1-7>
service-control

snmp-server

ftp

Disables FTP access to the
switch.

http

Disables web browser control to
the switch.

https

Disables secure web browser
access to the switch.

icmp

Disables ICMP access to the
switch such as pinging and
tracerouting.

snmp

Disables SNMP management.

ssh

Disables SSH (Secure Shell)
server access to the switch.

telnet

Disables telnet access to the
switch.

trap-destination


Disables sending of SNMP
traps to a station.
Disables STP.

spanning-tree
ssh

253



Disables STP on listed ports.

key


Disables the secure shell server
encryption key. Your switch
supports SSH versions 1 and 2
using RSA and DSA
authentication.

known-hosts


Removes the specified remote
hosts from the list of all known
hosts.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

known-hosts

[1024|sshrsa|ssh-dsa]

Removes remote known hosts
with the specified public key
(1024-bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).

storm-control

Disables broadcast storm
control.

timesync

Disables timeserver settings.

trunk


 interface

 lacp

vlan



Deletes the static VLAN entry.

vlan1q

gvrp

Disables GVRP on the switch.

port-isolation

Disables port isolation.

vlan-stacking
password

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

Disables VLAN stacking.
Change the password for
Enable mode.

254

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

policy

DESCRIPTION
Configures a policy. A classifier
distinguishes traffic into flows
based on the configured criteria.
A policy rule ensures that a
traffic flow gets the requested
treatment in the network.

 classifier
 <
[vlan]
[egress-port ]
[priority <0-7>]
[dscp <0-63>]
[tos <0-7>]
[bandwidth
]
[outgoing-packetformat
]
[out-of-profile-dscp
<0-63>]
[forward-action
]
[queue-action ]
[diffserv-action
]
[outgoing-mirror]
[outgoing-eport]
[outgoing-nonunicast-eport]
[outgoing-set-vlan ]
[metering]
[out-of-profileaction <[changedscp][drop][
forward]>]
[inactive]>

Enables 802.1x authentication
on the switch.

port-accessauthenticator

Enables 802.1x authentication
on the specified port(s).



Sets a subscriber to periodically
re-enter his or her username
and password to stay connected
to a specified port.

reauth-period


Specifies how often a client has
to re-enter the username and
password to stay connected to
the specified port(s).
Enables port security on the
device.

port-security


255

reauthenticate

Enables port security on the
specified port(s).

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

learn inactive

Disables MAC address learning
on the specified port(s).

address-limit


Limits the number of (dynamic)
MAC addresses that may be
learned on a port.

queue

level <0-7> priority
<0-7>

Sets the priority level-tophysical queue mapping.

radius-server

host  [acct-port
]
[key ]

Sets the IP address of the
external RADIUS server, UDP
port and shared key.

remotemanagement

 start-addr
 end-addr 
service


Specifies a group of trusted
computer(s) from which an
administrator may use a service
to manage the switch.

router

dvmrp

Enables and enters the DVMRP
configuration mode.

exit

Leaves the DVMRP
configuration mode.

threshold 

Sets the DVMRP threshold
value.
Enables and enters the IGMP
configuration mode.

igmp
exit

Enables and enters the OSPF
configuration mode.

ospf 

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

Leaves the IGMP configuration
mode.

area 

Enables and sets the area ID.

area 
authentication

Enables simple authentication
for the area.

area 
authentication
message-digest

Enables MD5 authentication for
the area.

area 
default-cost <065535>

Sets the cost to the area.

area 
name 

Sets a descriptive name for the
area for identification purposes.

area 
stub

Enables and sets the area as a
stub area.

area 
stub no-summary

Sets the stub area not to send
any LSA (Link State
Advertisement).

area 
virtual-link


Sets the virtual link ID
information for the area.

256

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

area 
virtual-link

authenticationkey 

Enables simple authentication
and sets the authentication key
for the specified virtual link in
the area.

area 
virtual-link

authenticationsame-as-area

Sets the virtual link to use the
same authentication method as
the area.

area 
virtual-link

message-digestkey  md5


Enables MD5 authentication
and sets the key ID and key for
the virtual link in the area.

area 
virtual-link
 name


Sets a descriptive name for the
virtual link for identification
purposes.

exit

Leaves the router OSPF
configuration mode.

network  area 
no area  Removes the specified area.

257

no area 
authentication

Sets the area to use no
authentication (None).

no area 
default-cost

Sets the area to use the default
cost (15).

no area 
stub

Disables stub network settings
in the area.

no area 
stub no-summary

Sets the area to send LSAs
(Link State Advertisements).

no area 
virtual-link

authenticationkey

Resets the authentication
settings on this virtual link.

no area 
virtual-link

message-digestkey

Resets the authentication
settings on this virtual link.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

no area 
virtual-link

authenticationsame-as-area

Resets the authentication
settings on this virtual area.

no area 
virtual-link


Deletes the virtual link from the
area.

no network 

Deletes the OSPF network.

no redistribute
rip

Sets the switch not to learn RIP
routing information.

no redistribute
static

Sets the switch not to learn
static routing information.

redistribute rip Sets the switch to learn RIP
metric-type <1|2> routing information which will
metric <0-65535> use the specified metric
information.

redistribute
static metrictype <1|2> metric
<0-65535>

Sets the switch to learn static
routing information which will
use the specified metric
information.
Enables and enters the RIP
configuration mode.

rip
exit

Leaves the RIP configuration
mode.
Adds aa new VRRP network nd
enters the VRRP configuration
mode.

vrrp network /
vr-id <1-7> uplinkgateway 
exit

Exits from the VRRP command
mode.

inactive

Disables the VRRP settings.

interval <1..255> Sets the time interval (in

seconds) between Hello
message transmissions.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

name 

Sets a descriptive name of the
VRRP setting for identification
purposes.

no inactive

Activates this VRRP.

no preempt

Disables VRRP preemption
mode.

no primaryvirtual-ip

Resets the network to use the
default primary virtual gateway
(interface IP address).

no secondaryvirtual-ip

Sets the network to use the
default secondary virtual
gateway (0.0.0.0).

258

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

service-control ftp 

snmp-server

Enables preemption mode.

primary-virtualip 

Sets the primary VRRP virtual
gateway IP address.

priority <1-254>

Sets the priroity of the uplinkgateway.

secondaryvirtual-ip 

Sets the secondary VRRP
virtual gateway IP address.
Allows FTP access on the
specified service port.

http 


Allows HTTP access on the
specified service port and
defines the timeout period.

https 

Allows HTTPS access on the
specified service port.

icmp

Allows ICMP management
packets.

snmp

Allows SNMP management.

ssh 

Allows SSH access on the
specified service port.

telnet 

Allows Telnet access on the
specified service port.

[contact ] [location
]

Sets the geographic location
and the name of the person in
charge of this switch.

get-community


Sets the get community.

set-community


Sets the set community.

trap-community


Sets the trap community.

trap-destination


Sets the IP addresses of up to
four stations to send your
SNMP traps to.
Enables STP on the switch.

spanning-tree

259

preempt



Enables STP on a specified
port.

 pathcost <1-65535>

Sets the STP path cost for a
specified port.

 priority
<0-255>

Sets the priority for a specified
port.

hello-time <1-10>
maximum-age <6-40>
forward-delay <4-30>

Sets Hello Time, Maximum Age
and Forward Delay.

help

Displays help information.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 95 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND

ssh

DESCRIPTION

priority <0-61440>

Sets the bridge priority of the
switch.

known-hosts  <1024|sshrsa|ssh-dsa> 

Adds a remote host to which the
switch can access using SSH
service.
Enables broadcast storm
control on the switch.

storm-control


Sets the time in hour, minute
and second format.

date 

Sets the date in year, month
and day format.

help

Displays help information.

timezone <1200|...|1200>

Selects the time difference
between UTC (formerly known
as GMT) and your time zone.



Sets the time server protocol.

server 

Sets the IP address of your time
server.



Activates a trunk group.

l
acp

Enables LACP for a trunk
group.

i
nterface 

Adds a port(s) to the specified
trunk group.

interface  timeout 

Defines the port number and
LACP timeout period.

vlan

<1-4094>

Enters the VLAN configuration
mode. See Section 40.9.6 on
page 265 for more information.

vlan1q

gvrp

Enables GVRP.

port-isolation

Enables port-isolation.

time

timesync

trunk

Enables VLAN stacking on the
switch.

vlan-stacking

vlan-type



Sets the SP TPID (Service
Provider Tag Protocol Identifier).

<802.1q|port-based>

Specifies the VLAN type.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

260

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

40.9.4 interface port-channel Commands
The following table lists the interface port-channel commands in configuration mode.
Use these commands to configure the ports.
Table 96 interface port-channel Commands
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

interface
port-channel


Enables a port or a list of ports
for configuration.
Enables bandwidth control on
the port(s).

bandwidth-limit
cir 

Sets the guaranteed bandwidth
allowed for incoming traffic on
the port(s).

egress 

Sets the maximum bandwidth
allowed for outgoing traffic on
the port(s).

ingress 

Sets the maximum bandwidth
allowed for incoming traffic on
the port(s).

pir 

Sets the maximum bandwidth
allowed for incoming traffic on
the port(s).

bpdu-control


Sets how Bridge Protocol Data
Units (BPDUs) are used in STP
port states.

broadcast-limit

Enables broadcast storm
control limit on the switch.

diffserv

Enables DiffServ on the port(s).



Enables the Destination Lookup
Failure (DLF) limit.

dlf-limit


261

Sets how many broadcast
packets the interface receives
per second.

Sets the interface DLF limit in
packets per second (pps).

egress set 

Sets the outgoing traffic port list
for a port-based VLAN.

exit

Exits from the interface portchannel command mode.

flow-control

Enables interface flow control.
Flow control regulates
transmissions to match the
bandwidth of the receiving port.

frame-type


Choose to accept both tagged
and untagged incoming frames
or just tagged incoming frames
on a port.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 96 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

gvrp

Enables this function to permit
VLAN groups beyond the local
switch.

help

Displays a description of the
interface port-channel
commands.

igmp-filtering

profile 

Applies the specified IGMP
filtering profile.
Enables the IGMP group
limiting feature.

igmp-group-limit
number 

Sets the maximum number
IGMP groups allowed.

igmp-immediate-leave

Enables the IGMP immidiate
leave function.

igmp-querier-mode


Sets the IGMP query mode for
the port.

inactive

Disables the specified port(s) on
the switch.

ingress-check

Enables the device to discard
incoming frames for VLANs that
are not included in a port
member set.

intrusion-lock

Enables intrusion lock on the
port(s) and a port cannot be
connected again after you
disconnected the cable.

ipmc egress-untagvlan <1-4094>

Enables the port(s) to remove
specified VLAN tag from IP
multicasting packets before
forwarding.

mirror

Enables port mirroring in the
interface.

dir 

Enables the port(s) multicast
limit.

multicast-limit


Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

Sets how many multicast
packets the port(s) receives per
second.
Sets a name for the port(s).
Enter a descriptive name (up to
nine printable ASCII
characters).

name 
no

Enables port mirroring for
incoming, outgoing or both
incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from
one or all ports to another or all
ports for external analysis.

bandwidth-limit

Disables bandwidth limit on the
port(s).

262

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 96 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

broadcast-limit

Disables broadcast storm
control limit on the port(s).

diffserv

Disables DiffServ on the port(s).

dlf-limit

Disables destination lookup
failure (DLF) on the switch.

egress-set 

Disables the egress port setting.

flow-control

Disables flow control on the
port(s).

gvrp

Disable GVRP on the port(s).

igmp-filtering
profile

Disables IGMP filtering.

igmp-group-limit

Disables IGMP group limitation.

igmp-immediateleave

Disables the IGMP immidiate
leave function.

inactive

Enables the port(s) on the
switch.

ingress-check

Disables ingress checking on
the port(s).

intrusion-lock

Disables intrusion-lock on a port
so that a port can be connected
again after you disconnected
the cable.

mirror

Disables port mirroring on the
port(s).

multicast-limit

Disables multicast limit on the
port(s).

vlan-trunking

Disables VLAN trunking on the
port(s).
The default PVID is VLAN 1 for
all ports. Sets a PVID in the
range 1 to 4094 for the specified
interface.

pvid <1-4094>

Sets the quality of service
priority for an interface.

qos

priority <0 .. 7>

speed-duplex



on the interface. Selecting
auto (auto-negotiation) makes
one port able to negotiate with a
peer automatically to obtain the
connection speed and duplex
mode that both ends support.

263

spq

Sets the port(s) to use Strict
Priority Queuing.

test

Performs an interface loopback
test.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 96 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

vlan-stacking

priority <0-7>

Sets the priority of the specified
port(s) in VLAN stacking.

role 

Sets the VLAN stacking port
roles of the specified port(s).

SPVID <1-4094>

Sets the service provider VID of
the specified port(s).

vlan-trunking

Enables VLAN Trunking on
ports connected to other
switches or routers (but not
ports directly connected to end
users) to allow frames
belonging to unknown VLAN
groups to pass through the
switch.

wrr

Sets the port(s) to use Weighted
Round Robin queuing (WRR).

  ...


Sets the interface to use WRR
queuing. A weight value of one
to eight is given to each variable
from wt1 to wt8.

40.9.5 interface route-domain Commands
The following table lists the interface route-domain commands in configuration mode.
Use these commands to configure the IP routing domains.
Table 97 interface route-domain Commands
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

interface
route-domain
/


Enables a routing domain for configuration.

Exits from the interface routing-domain
command mode.

exit
ip

dvmrp

Enables this function to permit VLAN groups
beyond the local switch.

igmp 

Enables IGMP in this routing domain.

ospf authentication- Enables OSPF authentication in this routing
domain.
key 
ospf authentication- Sets the same OSPF authentication settings in
the routing domain as the associated area.
same-aa
ospf cost <1-65535>

Sets the OSPF cost in this routing domain.

ospf message-digest- Sets the OSPF authentication key in this
routing domain.
key 

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

264

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 97 interface route-domain Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

rip direction


Sets the RIP direction in this routing domain.

vrrp authentication- Sets the VRRP authentication key in the
routing domain.
key 
no

ip dvmrp

Disables DVMRP in this routing domain.

ip igmp

Disables IP IGMP in this routing domain.

ip ospf
authentication-key

Disables OSPF authentication key settings in
this routing domain.

ip ospf
authentication-sama

Sets the routing domain not to use the same
OSPF authentication settings as the area.

ip ospf cost

Disables the OSPF cost in the routing domain.

ip ospf messagedigest-key

Sets the routing domain not to use a security
key in OSPF.

ip vrrp
authentication-key

Resets the VRRP authentication settings.

40.9.6 config-vlan Commands
The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode.
Table 98 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

vlan <1-4094>

Creates a new VLAN group.

exit

Leaves the VLAN configuration mode.

fixed 

Specifies the port(s) to be a permanent
member of this VLAN group.

forbidden 

Specifies the port(s) you want to
prohibit from joining this VLAN group.

help

Displays a list of available VLAN
commands.

inactive

Disables the specified VLAN.

ip address




Sets the IP address of the switch in the
VLAN.


 manageable

Sets the IP address of the switch in the
VLAN and allow remote management
to this IP address.

default gateway


Sets the default gateway IP address in
this VLAN.
Specifies a name for identification
purposes.

name 
no

265

fixed 

Sets fixed port(s) to normal port(s).

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 98 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

forbidden 

Sets forbidden port(s) to normal
port(s).

inactive

Enables the specified VLAN.

ip address  

Deletes the IP address and subnet
mask from this VLAN.

ip address
default-gateway

Deletes the default gateway from this
VLAN.

untagged 

Specifies the port(s) you want to tag all
outgoing frames transmitted with this
VLAN Group ID.

normal 

Specifies the port(s) to dynamically join
this VLAN group using GVRP

untagged 

Specifies the port(s) you don’t want to
tag all outgoing frames transmitted
with this VLAN Group ID.

40.10 mvr Commands
The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode.
Table 99 Command Summary: mvr Commands
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

mvr <1-4094>

Enters the MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) configuration mode.

exit

Exist from the MVR configuration
mode.

group 
start-address
 end-address


Sets the multicast group range for the
MVR.

inactive

Disables MVR settings.

mode 

Sets the MVR mode (dynamic or
compatible).

name 

Sets the MVR name for identification
purposes.

no

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

group

Disables all MVR group settings.

group 

Disables the specified MVR group
setting.

inactive

Enables MVR.

receiver-port


Disables the receiver port(s).An MVR
receiver port can only receive multicast
traffic in a multicast VLAN.

266

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 99 Command Summary: mvr Commands (continued)
COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

source-port 
multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.

tagged  Sets the port(s) to untag VLAN tags.

267

receiver-port


Sets the receiver port(s).An MVR
receiver port can only receive multicast
traffic in a multicast VLAN.

source-port


Sets the source port(s).An MVR
source port can send and receive
multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.

tagged 

Sets the port(s) to tag VLAN tags.

Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 41
Command Examples
This chapter describes some commands in more detail.

41.1 Overview
These are commands that you may use frequently in maintaining your switch.

41.2 show Commands
These are the commonly used show commands.

41.2.1 show system-information
Syntax:
show system-information

This command shows the general system information (such as the firmware version and
system up time).
An example is shown next.
Figure 159 show system-information Command Example
ras> show system-information
System Name
System Contact
System Location
Ethernet Address
ZyNOS F/W Version
RomRasSize
System up Time
Bootbase Version

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

00:13:49:1c:a2:9f
V3.60(TS.2)| 10/11/2005
3430448
3:18:31 (122ce8 ticks)
V3.0 | 04/08/2005

ras>

Chapter 41 Command Examples

268

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

41.2.2 show hardware-monitor
Syntax:
show hardware-monitor [c|f]

This command displays the current hardware status (such as temperature and voltage levels).
The following figure shows an example using degree Celsius as the temperature unit.
Figure 160 show hardware-monitor Command Example
ras> show hardware-monitor c
Temperature Unit : (c)
Temperature
Current MAX
MAC
33.0
34.0
CPU
32.0
32.0
PHY
37.0
37.5

MIN
32.0
31.0
35.5

Threshold
65.0
65.0
65.0

Status
Normal
Normal
Normal

FAN Speed(RPM)
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4

MIN
5908
6009
6114
6009

Threshold
4500
4500
4500
4500

Status
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

MIN
Threshold
2.576
+/-5%
1.216
+/-10%
3.344
+/-5%
12.220
+/-10%
5.080
+/-5%
1.328
+/-5%
1.248
+/-5%

Status
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

Voltage(V)
2.5
1.25
3.3
12
5
1.3
1.25
ras>

Current
5958
6061
6222
6061

MAX
6009
6114
6222
6114

Current MAX
2.576
2.576
1.216
1.216
3.360
3.360
12.220
12.281
5.080
5.080
1.328
1.328
1.248
1.248

41.2.3 show ip
Syntax:
show ip

This command displays the IP related information (such as IP address and subnet mask) on all
switch interfaces.
The following figure shows the default interface settings.

269

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 161 show ip Command Example
ras> show ip
Management IP Address
IP[192.168.0.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[0]
IP Interface
IP[192.168.1.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[1]
ras>

41.2.4 show logging
Note: This command is not available in User mode.
Syntax:
show logging

This command displays the system logs. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 162 show logging Command Example
ras# show logging
0 Thu Jan 1 00:00:11 1970 PP2b INFO adjtime task pause 1 day
7 Thu Jan 1 01:06:26 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf: can't get spOSPFArea_t
10 Thu Jan 1 01:06:38 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf: can't get spOSPFArea_t
13 Thu Jan 1 01:06:50 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf: can't get spOSPFArea_t
16 Thu Jan 1 01:07:05 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf: can't get spOSPFArea_t
20 Thu Jan 1 00:00:04 1970 PP0c -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
21 Thu Jan 1 00:00:06 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 1: warm start
22 Thu Jan 1 00:00:06 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
22 Thu Jan 1 00:00:06 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
24 Thu Jan 1 00:00:07 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf: can't get spOSPFArea_t
25 Thu Jan 1 00:00:11 1970 PP2b INFO adjtime task pause 1 day
30 Thu Jan 1 00:00:04 1970 PP0c -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
31 Thu Jan 1 00:00:06 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 1: warm start
32 Thu Jan 1 00:00:06 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
Clear Error Log (y/n):

Note: If you clear a log (by entering y at the Clear Error Log (y/n):prompt), you
cannot view it again.

41.2.5 show interface
Syntax:
show interface [port-number]

This command displays statistics of a port. The following example shows that port 2 is up and
the related information.

Chapter 41 Command Examples

270

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 163 show interface Command Example
ras# show interface 2
Port Info
Port NO.
Link
Statuss
LACP
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
Tx KBs/s
Rx KBs/s
Up Time
TX Packet
Tx Packets
Multicast
Broadcast
Pause
Tagged
RX Packet
Rx Packets
Multicast
Broadcast
Pause
Control
TX Collison
Single
Multiple
Excessive
Late
Error Packet RX CRC
Length
Runt
Distribution 64
65 to 127
128 to 255
256 to 511
512 to 1023
1024 to 1518
Giant
ras#

:2
:100M/F
:FORWARDING
:Disabled
:2778
:2043
:0
:0.0
:0.0
:
4:29:36
:2778
:0
:542
:0
:0
:2043
:0
:256
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:2355
:463
:435
:593
:154
:821
:0

41.2.6 show mac address-table
Syntax:
show mac address-table |static>

Where
 = Specifies the sorting criteria (MAC, VID or port).

This command displays the MAC address(es) stored in the switch. The following example
shows the static MAC address table.

271

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 164 show mac address-table Command Example
ras# show mac address-table static
Vid
Mac Port
Status
1 01:a0:c5:aa:aa:aa
1
Permanent
2 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81
1
Permanent
1 00:a0:c5:fe:ea:71 CPU
Permanent
2 00:a0:c5:fe:ea:71 CPU
Permanent
ras#

41.3 ping
Syntax:
ping  < [in-band|out-of-band|vlan  ] [ size <08024> ] [ -t ]>

where


=

The IP address of an Ethernet device.

[in-band|out-ofband|vlan 
]

=

Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the
Ethernet device belongs.
out-of-band refers the management port while in-band

means the other ports on the switch.
[ size <0-8024> ]

=

[ -t ]

=

Specifies the packet size to send.
Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely. Click
[CTRL]+ C to terminate the Ping process.

This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device. The following example sends Ping
requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100.
Figure 165 ping Command Example
ras# ping 192.168.1.100
sent rcvd rate
rtt
1
1 100
0
2
2 100
0
3
3 100
0
ras#

Chapter 41 Command Examples

avg
0
0
0

mdev
0
0
0

max
0
0
0

min
0
0
0

reply from
192.168.1.100
192.168.1.100
192.168.1.100

272

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

41.4 traceroute
Syntax:
traceroute  [in-band|out-of-band|vlan ][ttl <1255>] [wait <1-60>] [queries <1-10>]

where


=

The IP address of an Ethernet device.

[in-band|out-ofband|vlan  ]

=

Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the
Ethernet device belongs.

[ttl <1-255>]

=

Specifies the Time To Live (TTL) period.

[wait <1-60>]

=

Specifies the time period to wait.

[quesries <1-10>] =

Specifies how many tries the switch performs the traceroute
function.

This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device. The following
example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100.
Figure 166 traceroute Command Example
ras> traceroute 192.168.1.100
traceroute to 192.168.1.100, 30 hops max, 40 byte packet
1:192.168.1.100 (10 ms) (10 ms) (0 ms)
traceroute done:

41.5 Enabling RSTP
To enable RSTP on a port. Enter spanning-tree followed by the port number and press
[ENTER].
The following example enables RSTP on port 10.

273

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 167 Enable RSTP Command Example
ras(config)# spanning-tree 10
ras#

41.6 Configuration File Maintenance
This section shows you how to backup or restore the configuration file on the switch using
TFTP.

41.6.1 Configuration Backup
Syntax:
copy running-config tftp  

where


=

The IP address of a TFTP server on which you want to store the
backup configuration file.



=

Specifies the name of the configuration file.

This command backs up the current configuration file on a TFTP server. The following
example backs up the current configuration to a file (test.cfg) on the TFTP server
(172.23.19.96).
Figure 168 CLI: Backup Configuration Example
ras# copy running-config tftp 172.23.19.96 test.cfg
Backuping
. (683)Bytes Done!
ras#

41.6.2 Configuration Restoration
Syntax:
copy tftp config   

where


=

Specifies to restore which configuration file (1 or 2) on the switch.



=

The IP address of a TFTP server from which you want to get the
backup configuration file.



=

Specified the name of the configuration file.

Chapter 41 Command Examples

274

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

This command restores a configuration file on the switch. The following example uploads the
configuration file (test.cfg) from the TFTP server (172.23.19.96) to the switch.
Figure 169 CLI: Restore Configuration Example
ras# copy tftp config 1 172.23.19.96 test.cfg
Restoring
. (683)Bytes Done!
ras#

41.6.3 Using a Different Configuration File
You can store up to two configuration files on the switch. Only one configuration file is used at
a time. By default the switch uses the first configuration file (with an index number of 1). You
can set the switch to use a different configuration file. There are two ways in which you can set
the switch to use a different configuration file: restart the switch (cold reboot) and restart the
system (warm reboot).
Use the boot config command to restart the switch and use a different configuration file (if
specified). The following example restarts the switch to use the second configuration file.
Figure 170 CLI: boot config Command Example
ras# boot config 2

Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file
(if specified). The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file.
Figure 171 CLI: reload config Command Example
ras# reload config 2

Note: When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration
file index number, the switch saves the changes to the configuration file the
switch is currently using.

41.6.4 Resetting to the Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration.
2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file. If you want to
reset the second configuration file, use the write memory command again with the
specified index number.

275

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings.
Figure 172 CLI: Reset to the Factory Default Example
ras# erase running-config
ras# write memory
ras# write memory 2

41.7 no Command Examples
These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands.

41.7.1 no mirror-port
Syntax:
no mirror-port

Disables port mirroring on the switch.
An example is shown next.
Figure 173 no mirror-port Command Example
ras(config)# no mirror-port

41.7.2 no https timeout
Syntax:
no https timeout

Resets the https session timeout to default.
An example is shown next. The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds.
Figure 174 no https timeout Command Example
ras(config)# no https timeout
Cache timeout 300

Chapter 41 Command Examples

276

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

41.7.3 no trunk
Syntax:
no trunk 
no trunk  lacp
no trunk  interface 

where


Disables the trunk group.

 lacp

Disables LACP in the trunk group.


interface 

Removes ports from the trunk group.

•
•
•
•

An example is shown next.
Disable trunk one (T1).
Disable LAPC on trunk three (T3).
Remove ports one, three, four and five from trunk five (T5).

Figure 175 no trunk Command Example
ras(config)# no trunk T1
ras(config)# no trunk T3 lacp
ras(config)# no trunk T5 interface 1,3-5

41.7.4 no port-access-authenticator
Syntax:
no port-access-authenticator
no port-access-authenticator  reauthenticate
no port-access-authenticator 

where
= Disables port authentication on the switch.

reauthenticate

= Disables the re-authentication mechanism on the listed port(s).



= Disables authentication on the listed ports.

An example is shown next.
• Disable authentication on the switch.
• Disable re-authentication on ports one, three, four and five.
• Disable authentication on ports one, six and seven.

277

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 176 no port-access-authenticator Command Example
ras(config)# no port-access-authenticator
ras(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,3-5 reauthenticate
ras(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,6-7

41.7.5 no ssh
Syntax:
no ssh key 
no ssh known-hosts 
no ssh known-hosts  [1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa]

where
key 

Disables the secure shell server encryption key. Your switch
supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA
authentication.

known-hosts 

Remove specific remote hosts from the list of all known hosts.

known-hosts 
[1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa]

Remove remote known hosts with a specified public key (1024bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).

An example is shown next.
• Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key.
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.8 from the list of known hosts.
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.9 and with an SSH-RSA encryption
key from the list of known hosts.
Figure 177 no ssh Command Example
ras(config)# no ssh key rsa1
ras(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.8
ras(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.9 ssh-rsa

41.8 interface Commands
These are some commonly used commands that belong to the interface group of
commands.

Chapter 41 Command Examples

278

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

41.8.1 interface port-channel
Syntax:
interface port-channel 

Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration. Type multiple ports or port
ranges separated by a comma. Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash.
An example is shown next.
• Enter the configuration mode.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Begin configuring for those ports.
Figure 178 interface Command Example
ras# config
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)#

41.8.2 interface route-domain
Syntax:
interface route-domain /

where


= This is the IP address of the switch in the routing domain. Specify the IP
address is dotted decimal notation. For example, 192.168.1.1.



= The number of bits in the subnet mask. Enter the subnet mask number
preceded with a “/”. To find the bit number, convert the subnet mask to
binary and add all of the 1’s together. Take “255.255.255.0” for
example. 255 converts to eight 1’s in binary. There are three 255’s, so
add three eights together and you get the bit number (24).

Use this command to enable/create the specified routing domain for configuration.
An example is shown next.
• Enter the configuration mode.
• Enable default routing domain (the 192.168.1.1 subnet) for configuration.
• Begin configuring for this domain.

279

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 179 interface Command Example
ras# config
ras(config)# interface route-domain 192.168.1.1/24
cmd interface route domain
192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
ras(config-if)#

41.8.3 bpdu-control
Syntax:
bpdu-control 

where
peer|tunnel|discard|network>

=

Type peer to process any BPDUs received on
these ports.
Type tunnel to forward BPDUs received on
these ports.
Type discard to drop any BPDUs received on
these ports.
Type network to process and forward BPDUs
with a VLAN tag and to process untagged
BPDUs.

An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the BPDU control to tunnel, to forward BPDUs received on ports one, three, four
and five.
Figure 180 interface bpdu-control Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# bpdu-control tunnel
ras(config-interface)#

41.8.4 broadcast-limit
Syntax:
broadcast-limit
broadcast-limit 

Chapter 41 Command Examples

280

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

where
Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.


Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second.

An example is shown next.
• Enable port one for configuration.
• Enable broadcast control.
• Set the number of broadband packets the interface receives per second.
Figure 181 broadcast-limit Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1
ras(config-interface)# broadcast-limit
ras(config-interface)# broadcast-limit 21

41.8.5 bandwidth-limit
Syntax:
bandwidth-limit
bandwidth-limit egress 
bandwidth-limit ingress 

where
Enables bandwidth control on the switch.


Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic (egress) or
incoming traffic (ingress) on the switch.

An example is shown next.
•
•
•
•

Enable port one for configuration.
Enable bandwidth control.
Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 7Mbps.
Set the incoming traffic bandwidth limit to 9Mbps.

Figure 182 bandwidth-limit Command Example
ras(config)# interface
ras(config-interface)#
ras(config-interface)#
ras(config-interface)#

281

port-channel 1
bandwidth-limit
bandwidth-limit egress 7
bandwidth-limit ingress 9

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

41.8.6 mirror
Syntax:
mirror
mirror dir 

where
Enables port mirroring on the interface.


= Enables port mirroring for incoming, outgoing or both
incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another
or all ports for external analysis.

An example is shown next.
•
•
•
•
•

Enable port mirroring.
Enable the monitor port three.
Enable ports one, four, five and six for configuration.
Enable port mirroring on the ports.
Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic. Traffic is copied from ports one, four, five and
six to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic
flow on the original port(s).

Figure 183 mirror Command Example
ras(config)# mirror-port
ras(config)# mirror-port 3
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,4-6
ras(config-interface)# mirror
ras(config-interface)# mirror dir egress

41.8.7 gvrp
Syntax:
gvrp

GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for
switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this
function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
An example is shown next.

Chapter 41 Command Examples

282

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

• Enable the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the
switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable GVRP on the interface.
Figure 184 gvrp Command Example
ras(config)# vlan1q gvrp
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# gvrp

41.8.8 ingress-check
Syntax:
ingress-check

Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port
member set.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable ingress checking on the interface.
Figure 185 ingress-check Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# ingress-check

41.8.9 frame-type
Syntax:
frame-type 

where


Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged
incoming frames on a port.

An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable ingress checking on the ports.
• Enable tagged frame-types on the interface.

283

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 186 frame-type Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# ingress-check
ras(config-interface)# frame-type tagged

41.8.10 spq
Syntax:
spq

Sets the interface to use Strict Priority Queuing.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable VLAN Trunking on the ports.
Figure 187 spq Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# spq

41.8.11 wrr
Syntax:
wrr   ... 

where
Enables WRR (Weighted Round Robin) queuing method on the switch.
  ...


Sets the interface to use WRR queuing. A weight value of one to eight is
given to each variable from wt1 to wt8.

An example is shown next.
• Enable port two and ports six to twelve for configuration.
• Enable Weighted Round Robin queuing on the ports.
• Set the queue weights from Q0 to Q7.

Chapter 41 Command Examples

284

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 188 wrr Command Example
ras# configure
ras(config)# interface port-channel 2,6-12
ras(config-interface)# wrr
ras(config-interface)# wrr 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

41.8.12 egress set
Syntax:
egress set 

where
Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.



An example is shown next.
• Enable port-based VLAN tagging on the switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU (0), seven (7), eight (8) and nine (9).
Figure 189 egress set Command Example
ras(config)# vlan-type port-based
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# egress set 0,7-9

41.8.13 qos priority
Syntax:
qos priority <0 .. 7>

where
<0 .. 7>

Sets the quality of service priority for a port.

An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the IEEE 802.1p quality of service priority as four (4).

285

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 190 qos priority Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# qos priority 4

41.8.14 name
Syntax:
name 

where


Sets a name for your port interface(s).

An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set a name for the ports.
Figure 191 name Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# name Test

41.8.15 speed-duplex
Syntax:
speed-duplex 

where


Sets the duplex mode (half or full) and speed (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps)
of the connection on the port. Selecting auto (auto-negotiation)
makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain
the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.

An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the speed to 10 Mbps in half duplex mode.
Figure 192 speed-duplex Command Example
ras(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5
ras(config-interface)# speed-duplex 10-half

Chapter 41 Command Examples

286

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

287

Chapter 41 Command Examples

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 42
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
Commands
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands.

42.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Overview
See the VLAN chapter for more information on VLANs. There are two kinds of tagging:
1 Explicit Tagging
A VLAN identifier is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN.
2 Implicit Tagging
The MAC (Media Access Control) number, the port or other information is used to
identify the source of a VLAN frame.
The IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging.
Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per-LAN, perport basis (recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is
enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is
transmitted as an untagged frame.

42.2 VLAN Databases
A VLAN database stores and organizes VLAN registration information useful for switching
frames to and from a switch. A VLAN database consists of a static entries (Static VLAN or
SVLAN table) and dynamic entries (Dynamic VLAN or DVLAN table).

42.2.1 Static Entries (SVLAN Table)
Static entry registration information is added, modified and removed by administrators only.

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

288

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

42.2.2 Dynamic Entries (DVLAN Table)
Dynamic entries are learned by the switch and cannot be created or updated by administrators.
The switch learns this information by observing what port, source address and VLAN ID (or
VID) is associated with a frame. Entries are added and deleted using GARP VLAN
Registration Protocol (GVRP), where GARP is the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.

42.3 Configuring Tagged VLAN
The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN.
1 Use the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the
switch.
• Use the vlan  command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch. The
switch automatically enters the config-vlan mode.Use the inactive command to
deactivate the VLAN(s).
• Use the interface port-channel  command to enter the configinterface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port, then use the pvid 
command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port-list to that specific port in the
PVID table.
• Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN.
Example:
Figure 193 Tagged VLAN Configuration and Activation Example
ras
ras
ras
ras
ras
ras
ras
ras

(config)# vlan 2000
(config-vlan)# name up1
(config-vlan)# fixed 10-12
(config-vlan)# no untagged 10-12
(config-vlan)# exit
(config)# interface port-channel 10-12
(config-interface)# pvid 2000
(config-interface)# exit

2 Configure your management VLAN.
• Use the vlan  command to create a VLAN (VID 3 in this example) for
managing the switch, and the switch will activate the new management VLAN.
• Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN.
Example:

289

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 194 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example
ras (config)# vlan 3
ras (config-vlan)# inactive

42.4 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands
This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN.

42.4.1 GARP Status
Syntax:
show garp

This command shows the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all
timers.
An example is shown next.
Figure 195 GARP STATUS Command Example
ras # show garp
GARP Timer
-----------------------Join Timer = 200
Leave Timer = 600
Leave All Timer = 10000
ras#

42.4.2 GARP Timer
Syntax:
garp join  leave  leaveall 

where
join 

=

This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in
milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time
range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds; the default is 200
milliseconds.

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

290

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

leave 

=

This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in
milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time
must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600
milliseconds.

leaveall


=

This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in
milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All
Timer must be larger than Leave Timer; the default is 10000
milliseconds.

This command sets the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all
timers.
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join
message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All
message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds, the Leave Timer to 800
milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds.
Figure 196 GARP Timer Command Example
ras (config)# garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000

42.4.3 GVRP Timer
Syntax:
show vlan1q gvrp

This command shows the switch’s GVRP settings.
An example is shown next.
Figure 197 GVRP Status Command Example
ras # show vlan1q gvrp
GVRP Support
--------------------gvrpEnable = YES
GVRP Support

42.4.4 Enable GVRP
Syntax:
vlan1q gvrp

291

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch.

42.4.5 Disable GVRP
Syntax:
no vlan1q gvrp

This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to
other switches.

42.5 Port VLAN Commands
You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config-interface mode.

42.5.1 Set Port VID
Syntax:
pvid 

where


=

Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094

This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port(s).
The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5.
Figure 198 vlan1q port default vid Command Example
ras (config)# interface port-channel 1-5
ras (config-interface)# pvid 200

42.5.2 Set Acceptable Frame Type
Syntax:
frame-type 

where


=

Specifies all Ethernet frames (tagged and untagged) or only tagged
Ethernet frames.

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

292

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tag.
The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames.
Figure 199 frame type Command Example
ras (config)# interface port-channel 1-5
ras (config-interface)# frame-type tagged

42.5.3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP
Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port(s). Use the no gvrp command to disable
GVRP.
The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5.
Figure 200 no gvrp Command Example
ras (config)# interface port-channel 1-5
ras (config-interface)# no gvrp

42.5.4 Modify Static VLAN
Use the following commands in the config-vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table.
Syntax:
vlan 
fixed 
forbidden 
name 
normal 
untagged 
no fixed 
no forbidden 
no untagged 

where


=

The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].



=

A name to identify the SVLAN entry.

 =

This is the switch port list.

• Enter fixed to register the  to the static VLAN table with .
• Enter normal to confirm registration of the  to the static VLAN table with
.

293

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

• Enter forbidden to block a  from joining the static VLAN table with
.
• Enter no fixed or no forbidden to change  to normal status.
• Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag.
• Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames.

42.5.4.1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example
The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000.
Figure 201 Modifying Static VLAN Example
ras (config)# vlan 2000
ras (config-vlan)# fixed 1-5
ras (config-vlan)# untagged 1-5

42.5.4.2 Forwarding Process Example
Tagged Frames
1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID (VID) of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs
to untagged frames.
2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame’s tag against the SVLAN table.
3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says (that is, the SVLAN tells the switch
whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags).
4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision. This means that
frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them. Frames might also be
dropped if they are sent to a CPE (customer premises equipment) DSL device that does
not accept tagged frames.

Untagged Frames
1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN.
2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1.
3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came, because the switch does not send
a frame to the port from which it came. The switch also does not forward frames to
“forbidden” ports.
4 If after looking at the SVLAN, the switch does not have any ports to which it will send
the frame, it won’t check the port filter.

42.5.5 Delete VLAN ID
Syntax:
no vlan 

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

294

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

where


=

The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].

This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table. The
following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table.
Figure 202 no vlan Command Example
ras (config)# no vlan 2

42.6 Enable VLAN
Syntax:
vlan 

This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.

42.7 Disable VLAN
Syntax:
vlan 
inactive

This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.

42.8 Show VLAN Setting
Syntax:
show vlan

This command shows the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
An example is shown next.
• For the AdCtl section of the last column, “-“ is a port set to normal, “x” is a forbidden
port and “F” is a fixed port.
• For the TagCtl section of the last column, “T“ is a tagged port, “U” is an untagged port.

295

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 203 show vlan Command Example
ras# show vlan
802.1Q VLAN Static Entry:
idx. Name
VID Active
AdCtl / TagCtl
---- ------------ ---- -------- -----------------------0
1
1 active FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU
1
2 active -----------------------TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
ras#

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

296

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

297

Chapter 42 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

CHAPTER 43
Troubleshooting
This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies.

43.1 Problems Starting Up the Switch

Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Switch
PROBLEM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on.
turn on when you
turn on the switch. If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should
contact your vendor.

43.2 Problems Accessing the Switch

Table 101 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch
PROBLEM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

I cannot
access the
switch using
Telnet.

Make sure the ports are properly connected.
You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close
other Telnet session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled Telnet service access. If you have configured a secured
client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on
access control for details.

I cannot
access the
web
configurator.

The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is “1234”.
The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct
password and username using the proper casing. If you have changed the password
and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This
restores all of the factory defaults including the password.
If you have configured more than one IP interface, make sure another administrator is
NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same
account.
Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured
client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on
access control for details.
Your computer’s and the switch’s IP addresses must be on the same subnet.
See the following section to check that pop-up windows, JavaScripts and Java
permissions are allowed.

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

298

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

43.2.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.

43.2.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or
allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
43.2.1.1.1 Disable pop-up Blockers
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up
Blocker.
Figure 204 Pop-up Blocker

You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the
Privacy tab.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This
disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.

299

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 205

Internet Options

3 Click Apply to save this setting.
43.2.1.1.2 Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following
steps.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
2 Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

300

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 206 Internet Options

3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked)
with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.

301

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 207 Pop-up Blocker Settings

5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6 Click Apply to save this setting.

43.2.1.2 JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that
JavaScripts are allowed.
1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

302

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 208 Internet Options

2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Scripting.
4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
6 Click OK to close the window.

303

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 209 Security Settings - Java Scripting

43.2.1.3 Java Permissions
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
5 Click OK to close the window.

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

304

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 210 Security Settings - Java

43.2.1.3.1 JAVA (Sun)
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2 make sure that Use Java 2 for  under Java (Sun) is selected.
3 Click OK to close the window.

305

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Figure 211 Java (Sun)

43.3 Problems with the Password

Table 102 Troubleshooting the Password
PROBLEM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Cannot access the
switch.

The password field is case sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct
password using the proper casing.
The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is
“1234”. The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you
enter the correct password and username using the proper casing. If you have
changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the
default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the
password.

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

306

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

307

Chapter 43 Troubleshooting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

APPENDIX A
Product Specifications
The following table lists the product specifications.
Table 103 General Product Specifications
Interface

Layer 2
Features

GS-4012F: 12 mini-GBIC (SFP) slots
GS-4024: 24 10/100/1000 Base-Tx ports
4 Gigabit/mini-GBIC ports
One local management Ethernet port
Auto-negotiation
Auto-MDIX
Compliant with IEEE 802.3ad/u/x
Back pressure flow control for half duplex
Flow control for full duplex (IEEE 802.3x)
RJ-45 Ethernet cable connector
Rate limiting at 64Kbps steps
Bridging

16K MAC addresses
Static MAC address filtering (port lock)
Broadcast storm control
Limited maximum number of MAC addresses per port

Switching

Switching fabric: 48Gbps (GS-4024)/ 24Gbps (GS-4012F), non-blocking
Max. Frame size: 1522 bytes
Forwarding frame: IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q, Ethernet II, PPPoE
Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets

STP

IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol
IEEE 802.1w, rapid reconfiguration to recover network failure

QoS

IEEE 802.1p
Eight priority queues
Supports RFC 2475 DiffServ, DSCP to IEEE 802.1p priority mapping

Security

IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication

VLAN

Port-based VLAN setting
Tag-based (IEEE 802.1Q) VLAN
Number of VLAN: 4K
Supports GVRP

Link
aggregation

Supports IEEE 802.3ad; static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking
Six groups (up to 8 ports each)

Port mirroring

All ports support port mirroring

Bandwidth
control

Supports rate limiting at 1Mbps increment
Supports IGMP snooping

Product Specifications

308

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 103 General Product Specifications (continued)
Layer 3
Features

Layer 4
Features

IP forwarding

Wire-speed
8K IP address table
Filtering based on the source/destination IP address

Routing
protocols

Unicast: RIP-V1/V2, OSPF V2
Multicast: DVMRP
VRRP

IP services

DHCP server/relay

TCP/UDP port-based filtering
Bandwidth management

Table 104 Management Specifications
System Control

Alarm/Status surveillance
LED indication for alarm and system status
Performance monitoring
Line speed
Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)
Throughput monitoring
ICMP packet transmission
Port mirroring and aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP snooping
Firmware upgrade and download through FTP/TFTP
DHCP server/relay
Login authorization and security levels (read only and read/write)
Self diagnostics
FLASH memory

Network Management CLI through console port and Telnet
Web-based management
Clustering: up to 24 switches can be manage by one IP address
SNMP
RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms and events)
MIB

309

RFC1213 MIB II
RFC1253 OSPF MIBs
RFC1493 Bridge MIB
RFC1643 Ethernet MIB
RFC1757 Four groups of RMON
RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension

Product Specifications

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Table 105 Physical and Environmental Specifications
LEDs

Per switch: BPS, PWR, SYS, ALM
Per Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC port: 100, 1000/LNK, ACT
Per mini-GBIC port: LNK, ACT
Per Management port: 10, 100

Dimension

Standard 19” rack mountable
GS-4012F: 438 mm (W) x 225 mm (D) x 44.45 mm (H)
GS-4024: 438 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 44.45 mm (H)

Weight

GS-4012F: 3.1 Kg
GS-4024: 4.2 Kg

Temperature

Operating: 0º C ~ 45º C (32º F ~ 113º F)
Storage: -25º C ~ 70º C (13º F ~ 158º F)

Humidity

10 ~ 90% (non-condensing)

Power Supply

Overload protection
AC model:100 - 240VAC 50/60Hz 1.5A max internal universal power supply
DC model: -48VDC--60VDC, 1.2A Max.

Safety

UL 60950-1
CSA 60950-1
EN 60950-1
IEC 60950-1

EMC

FCC Part 15 (Class A)
CE EMC (Class A)

Product Specifications

310

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

311

Product Specifications

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

APPENDIX B
IP Subnetting
IP Addressing
Routers “route” based on the network number. The router that delivers the data packet to the
correct destination host uses the host ID.

IP Classes
An IP address is made up of four octets (eight bits), written in dotted decimal notation, for
example, 192.168.1.1. IP addresses are categorized into different classes. The class of an
address depends on the value of its first octet.
• Class “A” addresses have a 0 in the left most bit. In a class “A” address the first octet is
the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID.
• Class “B” addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit. In a class
“B” address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining
octets make up the host ID.
• Class “C” addresses begin (starting from the left) with 1 1 0. In a class “C” address the
first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID.
• Class “D” addresses begin with 1 1 1 0. Class “D” addresses are used for multicasting.
(There is also a class “E” address. It is reserved for future use.)
Table 106 Classes of IP Addresses
IP ADDRESS:

OCTET 1

OCTET 2

OCTET 3

OCTET 4

Class A

0

Network number

Host ID

Host ID

Host ID

Class B

10

Network number

Network number

Host ID

Host ID

Class C

110

Network number

Network number

Network number

Host ID

Note: Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed.
Therefore:
A class “C” network (8 host bits) can have 28 –2 or 254 hosts.
A class “B” address (16 host bits) can have 216 –2 or 65534 hosts.
A class “A” address (24 host bits) can have 224 –2 hosts (approximately 16 million hosts).

IP Subnetting

312

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Since the first octet of a class “A” IP address must contain a “0”, the first octet of a class “A”
address can have a value of 0 to 127.
Similarly the first octet of a class “B” must begin with “10”, therefore the first octet of a class
“B” address has a valid range of 128 to 191. The first octet of a class “C” address begins with
“110”, and therefore has a range of 192 to 223.
Table 107 Allowed IP Address Range By Class
CLASS

ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET
(BINARY)

ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET
(DECIMAL)

Class A

00000000 to 01111111

0 to 127

Class B

10000000 to 10111111

128 to 191

Class C

11000000 to 11011111

192 to 223

Class D

11100000 to 11101111

224 to 239

Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits
are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). A subnet mask has 32 is a “1” then
the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet
mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are. The “natural”
masks for class A, B and C IP addresses are as follows.

Table 108

“Natural” Masks

CLASS

NATURAL MASK

A

255.0.0.0

B

255.255.0.0

C

255.255.255.0

Subnetting
With subnetting, the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored. For example, a class C
address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID. With
subnetting, some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits. By convention,
subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit
of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.

313

IP Subnetting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing
a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128.
The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class “C” address using both
notations.
Table 109 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK “1” BITS

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

255.255.255.0

/24

0000 0000

255.255.255.128

/25

1000 0000

255.255.255.192

/26

1100 0000

255.255.255.224

/27

1110 0000

255.255.255.240

/28

1111 0000

255.255.255.248

/29

1111 1000

255.255.255.252

/30

1111 1100

The first mask shown is the class “C” natural mask. Normally if no mask is specified it is
understood that the natural mask is being used.

Example: Two Subnets
As an example, you have a class “C” address 192.168.1.0 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
Table 110 Two Subnets Example
NETWORK NUMBER

HOST ID

IP Address

192.168.1.

0

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

00000000

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.

0

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

00000000

The first three octets of the address make up the network number (class “C”). You want to
have two separate networks.
Divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits
of the IP address to a network number bit. The “borrowed” host ID bit can be either “0” or “1”
thus giving two subnets; 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 and 192.168.1.128 with
mask 255.255.255.128.

IP Subnetting

314

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Note: In the following charts, shaded/bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits
“borrowed” to form network ID bits. The number of “borrowed” host ID bits
determines the number of subnets you can have. The remaining number of
host ID bits (after “borrowing”) determines the number of hosts you can have
on each subnet.

Table 111 Subnet 1
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

0

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

00000000

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.

128

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

10000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1

Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

Table 112 Subnet 2
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

128

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

10000000

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.

128

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

10000000

Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129

Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have. Host IDs of all
zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that
subnet, so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 27 – 2
or 126 hosts for each subnet.
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the subnet itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet. Therefore, the lowest IP
address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192.168.1.1 and the highest
is 192.168.1.126. Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192.168.1.129 to
192.168.1.254.

315

IP Subnetting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Example: Four Subnets
The above example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a class “C” address space
into two subnets. Similarly to divide a class “C” address into four subnets, you need to
“borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00, 01, 10 and 11. The subnet
mask is 26 bits (11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet
contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26-2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (all 0’s is the subnet itself, all
1’s is the broadcast address on the subnet).
Table 113 Subnet 1
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

0

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

00000000

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1

Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62

Table 114 Subnet 2
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

64

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

01000000

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11000000

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

Table 115 Subnet 3
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

128

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

10000000

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11000000

Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129

Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190

IP Subnetting

316

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide
Table 116 Subnet 4
NETWORK NUMBER

LAST OCTET BIT VALUE

IP Address

192.168.1.

192

IP Address (Binary)

11000000.10101000.00000001.

11000000

Subnet Mask (Binary)

11111111.11111111.11111111.

11000000

Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193

Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

Example Eight Subnets
Similarly use a 27-bit mask to create 8 subnets (001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110).
The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 117 Eight Subnets
SUBNET

SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS

LAST ADDRESS

BROADCAST
ADDRESS

1

0

1

30

31

2

32

33

62

63

3

64

65

94

95

4

96

97

126

127

5

128

129

158

159

6

160

161

190

191

7

192

193

222

223

8

224

225

254

255

The following table is a summary for class “C” subnet planning.
Table 118 Class C Subnet Planning

317

NO. “BORROWED” HOST
BITS

SUBNET MASK

NO. SUBNETS

NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET

1

255.255.255.128 (/25)

2

126

2

255.255.255.192 (/26)

4

62

3

255.255.255.224 (/27)

8

30

4

255.255.255.240 (/28)

16

14

5

255.255.255.248 (/29)

32

6

6

255.255.255.252 (/30)

64

2

7

255.255.255.254 (/31)

128

1

IP Subnetting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks.
For class “A” and class “B” addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of
the network number and which are part of the host ID.
A class “B” address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class “A” address has
three host ID octets (see Table 106 on page 312) available for subnetting.
The following table is a summary for class “B” subnet planning.
Table 119 Class B Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED” HOST
BITS

SUBNET MASK

NO. SUBNETS

NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET

1

255.255.128.0 (/17)

2

32766

2

255.255.192.0 (/18)

4

16382

3

255.255.224.0 (/19)

8

8190

4

255.255.240.0 (/20)

16

4094

5

255.255.248.0 (/21)

32

2046

6

255.255.252.0 (/22)

64

1022

7

255.255.254.0 (/23)

128

510

8

255.255.255.0 (/24)

256

254

9

255.255.255.128 (/25)

512

126

10

255.255.255.192 (/26)

1024

62

11

255.255.255.224 (/27)

2048

30

12

255.255.255.240 (/28)

4096

14

13

255.255.255.248 (/29)

8192

6

14

255.255.255.252 (/30)

16384

2

15

255.255.255.254 (/31)

32768

1

IP Subnetting

318

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

319

IP Subnetting

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Index
Symbols

B

“standby” ports 110

Backbone 160
Backbone Router (BR) 160
Basic setting 72
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) 99
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) 99

Numerics
802.1P priority 83

C
A
Access control 206
Access priority 206
Limitation 206
Login account 209
Remote management 217
Service port 217
SNMP 207
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 232
Administrator password 210
Aggregator ID 112
Aging time 78
Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 314
Application 36
Backbone 36
Bridging 37
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 38
Switched workgroup 37
Area 0 160
Area Border Router (ABR) 160
Area ID 165, 168
ARP 232
How it works 232
View 232
AS Boundary Router 160
Authentication 165, 166, 167, 168, 169
Authority 3
Automatic VLAN registration 85
Autonomous system (AS) 34, 160, 174

Index

CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) 84
Change password 55
Changes or Modifications 3
CI Commands 238
Class of Service (CoS) 128, 180
Classifier
Ethernet Type 124
Example 126
Packet Format 123
View summary 125
CLI Command
Configure tagged VLAN example 289
Static VLAN Table example 294
Cluster management 35, 222
Cluster manager 222, 226
Cluster member 222, 226
Cluster member firmware upgrade 224
Network example 222
Setup 225
Specification 222
Status 223
Switch models 222
VID 226
Web configurator 224
Cluster manager 222
Cluster member 222
Command
Forwarding Process Example 294
Summary 242
Syntax conventions 238
Command Line Interface
Accessing 236
Introduction 236
Configuration file 57
Backup 201
Restore 57, 201

320

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Configure QoS 122
Console port 36
Settings 45
Copyright 2
CPU management port 91
CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) 69
Current date 76
Current time 76
Customer Support 6

D
Database Description (DD) 161
Default gateway 186
DHCP 32, 184
Client IP pool 186
Modes 184
Relay agent 184
Server 184
Setup 185
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 32, 184
Diagnostic 220
Ethernet port test 220
Ping 220
System log 220
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) 180
DiffServ 180
Activate 181
DS field 180
DSCP 180
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping 182
Network example 180
PHB 180
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 128
DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) 128
DiffServ marking rule 128
Double-tagged Frames 33, 138
DS (Differentiated Services) 180
DS field 128
DS See Differentiated Services
DSCP
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping 182
Service level 180
What it does 180
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) 180
DVLAN Table 288
DVMRP
Autonomous system 34, 174
Default timer setting 177
Error message 176
Graft 175

321

How it works 174
Implementation 174
Probe 175
Prune 175
Report 175
Setup 175
Terminology 175
Threshold 176
DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) 34,
174
Dynamic link aggregation 110

E
Egress port 93
Ethernet broadcast address 232
Ethernet port test 220
Ethernet ports
Default settings 45
Extended authentication protocol 116
External authentication server 116

F
Fan speed 74
FCC
Compliance 3
Feature
Hardware 35
File Transfer using FTP
command example 203
Filename convention 203
Filtering 96
Filtering database 228
Firmware 73
Upgrade 200, 224
Flow control 82
Back pressure 82
IEEE802.3x 82
Front panel 44
FTP 203
File transfer procedure 204
Restrictions over WAN 205

G
GARP 85, 289

Index

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) 85
garp status 290
GARP Status Command 290
GARP timer 78, 85
General setup 74
Getting help 58
Gigabit Ethernet ports 45
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 76
GVRP 85, 90, 91, 289
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) 85, 282
gvrp disable 292
gvrp enable 291
gvrp status 291

H
Hardware installation 40
Hardware monitor 73
Hardware overview 44
Host IDs 312
How SSH works 211
HTTP 126
HTTPS 212
HTTPS Example 213

I
IEEE 802.1p 78
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN 288
IEEE 802.1x 116
Activate 117
Note 116
Reauthentication 117
IGMP 34, 172, 174
Setup 172
Version 172
IGMP snooping 77, 144
Ingress port 93
Installation
Freestanding 40
Precautions 41
Rack-mounting 41
Interface 161, 162, 167
Internal Router (IR) 160
Introduction 32
IP Addressing 312
IP Classes 312

Index

IP interface 79, 192
IP Ports 126
IP routing domain 79
IP setup 79
IP table 230
How it works 230
View 231
iStacking 35

K
Key 168

L
LACP 110
System priority 113
Timeout 114
LEDs 48
Limit MAC address learning 121
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP) 110
Link aggregation 35, 110
Dynamic 110
ID information 111
Setup 112
Status 112
Link state database 161, 162
Lockout 56
Log 220
Login 50
Password 55
Login account 209
Administrator 210
Non-administrator 210
Number of 209
Login password 210
LSA (Link State Advertisement) 161

M
MAC (Media Access Control) 73
MAC address 73, 232
Maximum number per port 121
MAC address learning 35, 78, 94, 120, 121
Specify limit 121
MAC table 228

322

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

How it works 228
View 229
Maintenance 200
Management Information Base (MIB) 207
Management port 93
MD5 165
Metric 164
MIB 207
Supported MIBs 208
Mini GBIC ports 45
Connection speed 46
Connector type 46
Transceiver installation 46
Transceiver removal 46
Modifications 3
Mounting brackets 41
MSA (MultiSource Agreement) 45
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 76
Multicast delivery tree 175
Multicast router (“mrouter”) 175

N
Network management system (NMS) 207
NTP (RFC-1305) 76

O
OSPF 34, 160
Advantage 160
Area 160, 165
Area 0 160
Area ID 165, 168
Authentication 165, 166, 167, 168, 169
Autonomous system 160
Backbone 160
Configuration steps 161
General settings 163
How it works 161
Interface 161, 162, 167
Link state database 161, 162
Network example 161
Redistribute route 164
Route cost 166
Router ID 164
Router types 160
Status 162
Stub area 160, 166
Virtual link 161, 168
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) 34, 160

323

OSPF vs RIP 160
Out of Profile Action 131
Out-of-profile traffic 130

P
Password 55, 227
PHB (Per-Hop Behavior) 128, 180
Physical queue 134
Ping 220
Policy
Actions 130
Example 132
Metering 130
View summary 131
Policy Rules 128
POP3 126
Port authentication 116
IEEE802.1x 117
RADIUS server 118
Port Based VLAN Type 78
Port details 67
Port isolation 90, 93
Port Mirroring 262, 282
Port mirroring 33, 108
Port redundancy 110
Port security 35, 120
Limit MAC address learning 121
Port setup 81
Port speed/duplex 82
Port status 66
Port VID
Default for all ports 263
Port VLAN trunking 86
Port-based VLAN 91
All connected 93
Port isolation 93
Setting Wizard 93
Power 74
Backup power supply connector 48
Voltage 74
Priority 78
Priority level 78
Priority queue assignment 78
Product specification 308
PVID 91

Index

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Q
Quality of Service (QoS) 122
Queue priority 136
Queue weight 135, 136
Queuing 33, 134
Queuing algorithm 134, 136
Queuing method 134, 136
Calculate 136

R
RADIUS 116
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)
116
RADIUS server 116
Advantages 116
Network example 116
Settings 118
Rear panel 47
Redistribute route 164
Related Documentation 30
Remote management 217
Service 218
Trusted computers 218
Reset 56
Reset to factory default settings 202
Restore configuration 56
Return Material Authorization number (RMA) 5
Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) 175
Reverse Path Multicasting (RPM) 174
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) 74
Round Robin Scheduling 135
Router ID 164
Routing domain 79, 192
Routing protocol 164
Routing table 234
RSTP (Rapid STP) 35
Rubber feet 40

S
Safety warnings 4
Service access control 217
Service port 217
Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier 140
Service Provider’s Network 138

Index

SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) 45
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 207
SNMP 207
Agent 207
Communities 209
Management model 207
Manager 207
MIB 207, 208
Network components 207
Object variables 207
Protocol operations 208
Setup 209
Traps 208
Versions supported 207
SP TPID 140
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 98
SPN 138
SSH 211
SSH Implementation 212
Static MAC address 35, 94, 120
Static MAC forwarding 94
Static VLAN 88
Control 89
Tagging 89
Status 51, 66
LED 48
Link aggregation 112
OSPF 162
Port 66
Port details 67
STP 99
VLAN 87
VRRP 191
STP 98
Bridge ID 100
Bridge priority 102
Configuration 101
Designated bridge 99
Forwarding Delay 102
Hello BPDU 99
Hello Time 100, 102
How it works 99
Max Age 100, 102
Path cost 98, 102
Port priority 102
Port state 99
Root port 99
Status 99
Terminology 98
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) 35
Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) 134
Stub area 160, 166
Subnet Masks 313
Subnetting 313
SVLAN Table 288

324

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Switch lockout 56
Switch reset 56
Switch setup 77
Syntax Conventions 30
sys Commands
examples 268, 276, 278
sys log disp 270, 276, 279
sys sw mac list 271
System information 72
System log 220
System reboot 202
System up time 67

T
Tagged VLAN 84
TCP/UDP protocol port numbers 124
Temperature 73
Time
Current 76
Time zone 76
Timeserver 76
Time (RFC-868) 76
Time service protocol 76
Time format 76
Time To Live (TTL) 176
Time zone 76
Timeserver 76
Transceiver
Installation 46
Removal 46
Trap
Destination 209
Traps 208
Trunk group 110
Trunking 35, 110
Type of Service (ToS) 180

U
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) 76

V
Ventilation 40

325

Ventilation holes 40
VID 81, 84, 88, 140
Number of possible VIDs 84
Priority frame 84
VID (VLAN Identifier) 84
Virtual link 161, 168
Virtual router
Status 191
Virtual router (VR) 190
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 190
VLAN 76, 84
Acceptable frame type 91
Automatic registration 85
Explicit Tagging 288
ID 84
ID (VID) 289
Implicit Tagging 288
Ingress filtering 90
Introduction 76
Number of VLANs 88
Port isolation 90
Port number 88
Port settings 90
Port-based VLAN 91
Registration Information 288
Static VLAN 88
Status 87, 88
Tagged 84
Trunking 86
Type 78, 86
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 33, 76
VLAN Databases 288
VLAN number 81
VLAN Stacking 33, 138
VLAN trunking 91
vlan1q port accept 292
vlan1q port gvrp 293
vlan1q svlan active 295
vlan1q svlan delentry 294
vlan1q svlan inactive 295
vlan1q svlan list 295
vlan1q svlan setentry 293
VRID (Virtual Router ID) 191
VRRP 190
Advertisement interval 193
Authentication 193
Backup router 190
Configuration example 195
Hello message 193
How it works 190
Interface setup 192
Master router 190
Network example 190, 195
Parameter 193
Preempt mode 193, 194

Index

GS-4012F/4024 User’s Guide

Priority 193, 194
Status 191
Uplink gateway 194
Uplink status 191
Virtual IP 194
Virtual router 190
Virtual Router ID 194
VRID 191

W
Web configuration
Screen summary 53
Web configurator
Getting help 58
Home 51
Login 50
Logout 57
Navigation panel 52
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)
Weight 136
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) 135

Z
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 203
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
Note 5

Index

326


Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Modify Date                     : 2006:05:19 11:07:45+08:00
Create Date                     : 2006:05:19 11:02:24Z
Page Count                      : 326
Creation Date                   : 2006:05:19 11:02:24Z
Mod Date                        : 2006:05:19 11:07:45+08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : Cindy Yang
Metadata Date                   : 2006:05:19 11:07:45+08:00
Creator                         : Cindy Yang
Title                           : GS-4012F/GS-4024 User's Guide V3.60 (Ed. 2, May 2006)
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools







 




Navigation menu